96 thunderbird

321

Transcript of 96 thunderbird

[PI00010( B )05/95]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:rcpib.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:48 1996

*[PI00400( ALL)05/95]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:rcpib.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:48 1996

*[PI00425( ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introductory Information ............................... 1

Safety Restraints .............................................. 7

Starting Your Thunderbird ......................... 45

Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 55

Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 73

Steering Column Controls .......................... 91

Features .......................................................... 101

Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 131

Driving Your Thunderbird ....................... 165

Roadside Emergencies ................................ 185

Customer Assistance ................................... 203

Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 211

Accessories .................................................... 215

Servicing Your Thunderbird...................... 223

Quick Index .................................................. 297

Index ............................................................... 307

Service Station Information ...................... 324

File:rcpib.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:48 1996

1

Introductory Information

*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles

*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

2

*[IN01100( ALL)04/95] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[IN01200( ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[IN01300( ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.

*[IN01400( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[IN01420( ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information aboutthe subject matter you are referencing.

*[IN01440( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially carefulin those areas where carelessness can causedamage to your vehicle or personal injury toyourself, your passengers or other people. Pleaseread all WARNINGS carefully.

*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

*[IN01500( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide

*[IN01600( ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index or the Index.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

3

*[IN01700( ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.

*[IN01900( ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.

%*[IN02000( ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[IN02100( ALL)04/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

*[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet liststhe services that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.

%*[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties[IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of

warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[IN03100( ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

4

*[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this owner guide.

%*[IN04000( ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan

*[IN04100( ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you canbuy a Ford Extended Service Plan for yourvehicle. This optional contract provides serviceprotection for a longer period of time than thebasic warranty that comes with your vehicle.

*[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when youbuy your vehicle. However, your option topurchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runsout after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See yourdealer for more details about the Ford ExtendedService Plan.

*[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did nottake advantage of the Ford Extended ServicePlan at the time of purchase, you may still beeligible. See your dealer for the details.

%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[IN06100( ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment orbreak-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[IN06300( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[IN06400( ALL)01/95] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.

*[IN06500( ALL)01/95] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[IN06600( ALL)01/95] — Apply the brakes gradually.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

5

*[IN06700( ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

%*[IN06800( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.

*[IN07000( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an ElectronicPowertrain Control Module that limits engineand/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode topromote durability.

%*[IN07100( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicle

*[IN07130( ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[IN07160( ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[IN07190( MVBCG )05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorized itsdealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

6

%*[IN07200( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[IN07300( ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a mild detergent.

*[IN07400( ALL)04/95] DO NOT:

*[IN07500( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[IN07600( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[IN08100( ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.

%*[IN08200( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[IN08300( ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.

%*[IN08400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[IN08500( ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[IN08600( ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[IN08700( ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.

File:rcinb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:37 1996

7

Safety Restraints

%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SR00600( ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada the law requires their use.

*[SR00800( ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SR00900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SR01000( ALL)01/95] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SR01100( ALL)01/95] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SR01200( ALL)01/95] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SR01300( ALL)01/95] ❑ the knees are straight forward

*[SR02100( ALL)05/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime inthe Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.

*[SR02500( ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.

%*[SR02600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Make sure that you and your passengerswear safety belts. Always drive and ridewith your seatback upright and the lapbelt snug and low across the hips.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

8

*[SR02700( ALL)03/95] RWARNING

Never wear the shoulder belt under thearm. Never swing it around the neck overthe inside shoulder. Never use a singlebelt for more than one person or acrossmore than one seating position. Eachseating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair.Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision.

*[SR02801( ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Never drive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt. If you cannot untwistor unjam the safety belt, see the nearestqualified technician immediately.

*[SR02901( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.

*[SR03001( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.

*[SR03200( ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving tolessen the risk of the door coming open in acollision.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

9

[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and ShoulderBelts

*[SR03800( ALL)01/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combinationlap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, corner hard or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder beltlocks and helps reduce your forward movement.

*[SR04100( ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the seat to the positionthat suits you best.

[SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder beltfrom the retractor so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be surethe belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckleuntil you hear a snap and feel it latch. Makesure the tongue is securely fastened in thebuckle.

*[SR04550( BCGV)01/95]

quarter page art:0010018-B

Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

10

[SR04600( BCGV)03/95]

one third page art:0010502-A

Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt

*[SR04675( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information atthe beginning of this chapter.

% [SR04677( BC )05/95] Safety Belts for the Front PassengerOutboard Seating Positions

[SR04680( BC )03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt forfront seat passengers and a locking “cinchtongue” for rear outboard passengers.

*[SR04682( ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in twoways:

*[SR04683( ALL)03/95] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

[SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will allow the occupant freedom ofmovement, locking tight only on hard braking,hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can alsobe made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.

%*[SR04685( ALL)04/95] Automatic locking mode

[SR04686( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and remainlocked when the combination lap/shoulder

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

11

safety belt is buckled, and does not allow theoccupant freedom of movement. This modeprovides the following:

[SR04687( ALL)03/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.

[SR04688( ALL)03/95] ❑Child seat or infant carrier installationrestraint.

*[SR04689( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never install a rear-facing child seat orinfant carrier in the right front passengerseat.

*[SR04690( ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a childsafety seat on the front passenger seat and rearoutboard seats where dual locking retractors areprovided.

*[SR04691( ALL)04/95] To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SR04692( ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SR04693( ALL)03/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted, and when allowed to retract, aclicking sound will be heard. At this time,the belt retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode).

*[SR04694( ALL)05/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard asthe belt is allowed to retract.

[SR04695( ALL)03/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch back to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

12

% [SR05305( BC )03/95] Safety Belts with Locking Cinch Tonguefor Rear Outboard Seating Positions

[SR05307( BC )04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with safety seat beltscontaining a cinch tongue at the rear outboardseating positions.

*[SR05310( BC )03/95] The locking cinch tongue will slide up anddown the belt webbing when the belt is in thestowed position or while putting seat belts on.When the locking cinch tongue of thelap/shoulder combination seat belt is latchedinto the buckle, the cinch tongue will allow thelap portion to become shorter, but locks thewebbing in place to restrict it from becominglonger.

*[SR05320( BC )03/95] Before you can reach and latch a combinationlap and shoulder belt having a cinch tongue intothe buckle, you may have to lengthen the lapbelt portion of it. To lengthen the lap belt, pullsome webbing out of the shoulder belt retractor.While holding the webbing below the tongue,grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongue sothat it is parallel to the webbing and slide thetongue upward. Provide enough lap belt lengthso that the tongue can reach the buckle.

*[SR05325( BC )03/95] NOTE: If you grasp the tongue by the tonguecover to lengthen the belt, the tonguecover will grab the webbing, making itdifficult to slide.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

13

[SR05330( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011373-A

Adjusting the cinch tongue rear combination lap andshoulder belt

*[SR05335( BC )05/95] To fasten a cinch tongue, pull the combinationlap and shoulder belt from the retractor so thatthe shoulder belt portion of the safety beltcrosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the beltis not twisted. If the belt is twisted remove thetwist. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle for your seating position until you hear asnap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue issecurely fastened to the buckle by pulling on thetongue.

*[SR05400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

14

*[SR05500( BCGV)03/95] RWARNING

All front and rear seat outboardoccupants (including pregnant women)should wear lap and shoulder belts, foroptimum protection in a collision.

*[SR05600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow these precautions couldincrease the risk and/or severity of injuryin a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt onthe outside shoulder only. Never wear theshoulder belt under the arm. 2) Neverswing it around your neck over the insideshoulder. 3) Never use a single belt formore than one person.

*[SR05630( BC )03/95] Due to folding rear seats, sometimes the bucklesand tongues toward the center of the vehiclemay be hidden by the rear edge of the seatcushion. Pull them out so they will be accessible.

*[SR05635( BC )03/95] While you are fastened in the seat belt, thecombination lap/shoulder belt with a cinchtongue adjusts to your movement. However, ifyou brake hard, turn hard, or if your vehiclereceives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) or more,the safety belt will become locked and helpreduce your forward movement.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

15

[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:

[SR05900(MBC )06/93] 1. Push the release button on the end of thebuckle. This allows the tongue to unlatchfrom the buckle.

[SR06200( BC )03/95]

one third page art:0011336-A

Unfastening the front outboard lap/shoulder belts

[SR06250( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011370-A

Unfastening the rear outboard lap/shoulder belts

*[SR06600( ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue toits stowed position. If you do not guide thetongue, it may strike you or part of thevehicle.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

16

% [SR09300( BC )05/95] Lap Belts — Rear Center SeatingPositions

*[SR09600( BC )05/95] The lap belt in the center of the rear seat doesnot adjust automatically. You must adjust it tofit snugly and as low as possible around yourhips. Do not wear it around your waist.

*[SR09701( BCGV)05/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make surethe buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SR09801( BCGV)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andtip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.Pull the belt tongue over your lap until itreaches the buckle.

*[SR09901( BCGV)05/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the looseend of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.

*[SR10300( BCGV)05/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatchfrom the buckle.

[SR10400( BC )11/92] Because the center lap belt does not have aretractor, it should be shortened and fastenedwhen not in use.

[SR10620( BC )05/94]

one third page art:0000029-E

Unfastening center rear seat lap belt

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

17

%*[SR17500( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SR17600( ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be tooshort even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly (partnumber 611C22). Safety belt extensions areavailable at no cost from your dealer.

*[SR17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.

*[SR17705( ALL)05/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.

[SR17710( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SR17720(MBCG )05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically tomake sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.

%*[SR17730( ALL)05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

18

during a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.

%*[SR17740( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[SR17780( ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

*[SR17800( ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

*[SR18200( ALL)04/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags areSupplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), providedat these seating positions in addition to thelap/shoulder belt, and are designed tosupplement the protection provided to properlybelted occupants in moderate to severe frontalcollisions. The supplemental air bag system doesnot provide restraint to the lower body.

*[SR18400( ALL)02/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts

*[SR18425( ALL)11/93] RWARNING

Safety belts must be worn by all vehicleoccupants to be properly restrained andhelp reduce the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR18450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, even when an air bag SupplementalRestraint System is provided.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

19

*[SR18500( ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to usesafety belts even with an air bag system. Useyour safety belts to:

*[SR18600( ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (awayfrom the air bag) when it inflates

*[SR18700( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side orrear impact collisions, because an air bag isnot designed to inflate in such situations

*[SR18800( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisionsthat are not severe enough to activate thesupplemental air bag

*[SR18900( ALL)01/95] ❑ reduce the risk of being thrown from yourvehicle

%*[SR19100( ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated

*[SR19200( ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremelyfast to help provide additional protection foryou. In order to do this, the air bag must inflatewith considerable force. If you are not seated ina normal riding position with your back againstthe seatback, the air bag may not protect youproperly and could possibly hurt you as itinflates.

*[SR19230( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If a passenger is not properly seated andrestrained, an inflating air bag could causeserious injury.

*[SR19235( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Rear-facing infant seats should never beplaced in the front seat.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

20

[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head iscloser to the air bag. The force of the rapidlyinflating air bag could push the top of therear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,center console (if so equipped), or centerarmrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACINGINFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECUREDIN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safetyseats and infant seats should be secured in therear seat whenever possible.

*[SR19260( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right frontpassenger air bag. Air bags deploy with greatforce, faster than the blink of an eye. Frontpassengers, especially children and small adults,must never sit on the front edge of the seat,stand near the glove compartment of theinstrument panel, or lean over near the air bagcover when the vehicle is moving. All occupantsshould sit with their backs against the seatback,move the seat to the most rearward position ifpossible and use the safety belts. Childrenweighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always shoulduse child or infant seats.

%*[SR19300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

[SR19350(MBC )05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATINGPASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOPOF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THEVEHICLE SEATBACK OR CENTERCONSOLE/ARMRESTS. REAR-FACINGINFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE PLACEDIN THE REAR SEAT.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

21

*[SR19400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the air bag cover on thesteering wheel or in front seat areas thatmay come in contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow this instruction mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

*[SR19405( ALL)05/95] For additional important safety information onthe proper use of seat belts, child seats, andinfant seats, please read the other sections of thispart of the Owner Guide, especially sectionsentitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seatsfor Children.

*[SR19410( ALL)05/95] For further information about the propermounting of equipment in the front seat of thisvehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitledSome Important Information About Air BagSupplemental Restraint System which can beobtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.Ask for brochure FPS-8602.

%*[SR19500( ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem Operates

[SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steeringwheel. The right front passenger seat air bag isin the upper right hand section of theinstrument panel ledge above the glovecompartment. Both air bags are designed to stayout of sight until they are activated.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

22

[SR20001( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011353-A

The location of the air bag and warning labels

*[SR20800( ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense theseverity of the impact and activates the air bagsif necessary. The air bag system is designed todeploy in frontal and front-angled collisionsmore severe than hitting a parked vehicle (ofsimilar size and weight) head-on at about28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system sensesthe crash severity rather than vehicle speed,some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.

*[SR20930( ALL)05/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takesplace in a matter of seconds.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

23

*[SR20960( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Air bag system components get hot afterinflation. Do not touch them afterinflation.

*[SR21110( ALL)03/93]

half page art:0011063-A

Inflated driver side air bag

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

24

[SR21130( ALL)10/94]

half page art:0011064-A

Inflated right front passenger side air bag

*[SR22200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAGWILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN ANDMUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. Ifthe air bag is not replaced, the unrepairedarea will increase the risk of injury in acollision.

*[SR22210( ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and atone to indicate the condition of the system. Thereadiness light is in the instrument cluster. Whenyou turn the ignition to the ON position, thislight will illuminate for approximately six (6)seconds and then turn off. This indicates that thesystem is operating normally. NOTE:Maintenance of the air bag system is notrequired.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

25

%*[SR22220( ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

[SR22225( ALL)05/95] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,or

[SR22230( ALL)05/95] ❑ it will not light immediately after the ignitionis turned on, or

[SR22240( ALL)05/95] ❑a group of five beeps will be heard.

*[SR22250( ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bagsupplemental restraint system may not functionproperly in the event of a collision.

*[SR22260( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System or its fuses. See yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

%*[SR22300( ALL)05/95] Disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles

*[SR22400( ALL)05/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of byqualified personnel.

%*[SR23500( ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SR23600( ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

26

*[SR23700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.

*[SR23800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Passengers should not be allowed to ridein the cargo area. Persons not riding in aseat with a fastened seat belt are muchmore likely to suffer serious injury in acollision. Cargo should always be securedto prevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[SR23900( ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.

*[SR24000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.

*[SR24100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

27

*[SR24200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never leave a child unattended in yourvehicle.

%*[SR24250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

When using forward-facing child seatsmove the passenger seat as far back fromthe instrument panel as possible. NEVERSECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATSIN THE FRONT SEAT.

%*[SR25100( ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children

*[SR25200( ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

% [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seathaving a top tether strap. Install the child safetyseat in a seating position which is capable ofproviding a tether anchorage. For moreinformation on top tether straps see your Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SR25250( ALL)02/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

*[SR25275( ALL)05/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg)should use child or infant seats. Forward facingchild seats must have the passenger seat movedas far back from the instrument panel aspossible.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

28

%*[SR25300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULDNEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT.REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUSTALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REARSEAT. Failure to follow these instructionscould result in serious injury.

*[SR25350( ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.

*[SR25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.

*[SR25500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.

*[SR25520(MBC )05/95] RWARNING

Always keep the buckle release buttonpointing upward and away from the childseat, with the tongue between the childseat and the release button as shown inthe following illustration.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

29

% [SR31859( BC )05/95] Installing Safety Seats in the FrontOutboard Passenger Seating Position

[SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a duallocking mode retractor, use the followingprocedure.

[SR31865( ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat orinfant carrier in the front seating positions, movevehicle seat as far back as possible.

*[SR31870( ALL)04/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of thepassenger seat.

*[SR31875( ALL)04/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then graspshoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1.

*[SR31880( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011238-B

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

30

*[SR31885( ALL)04/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure that the belt webbing is not twisted.

*[SR31890( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011239-B

Routing the lap/shoulder belt

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

31

*[SR31893( ALL)04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for thatseating position until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Figure 3. Make sure tongue islatched securely to buckle by pulling ontongue.

*[SR31895( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011240-B

Buckling the belt

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

32

*[SR31900( ALL)04/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4.

*[SR31902( ALL)04/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor mustbe in the automatic locking mode toproperly restrain a child.

*[SR31905( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011241-A

Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode

*[SR31910( ALL)04/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. Figures 5 and 6.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

33

*[SR31915( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011242-A

*[SR31920( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011243-A

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

34

*[SR31925( ALL)04/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place, Figure 7.

*[SR31930( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011244-A

Checking that the seat is secure

*[SR31935( ALL)04/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode,Figure 8.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

35

*[SR31940( ALL)04/95]

half page art:0011245-B

Checking the retractor

*[SR31945( ALL)04/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

% [SR31960( BC )03/95] Installing Child Safety Seats in the RearOutboard Seating Positions

[SR31970( BC )03/95] Your rear outboard seating positions areequipped with a cinch tongue on the safetybelts. Use the following procedure for installinga child safety seat in these locations.

*[SR31980( BC )04/95] 1. Grasp the belt webbing below the tongueand pull as much of the belt out of theretractor as possible. Hold the belt out. SeeFigure 1.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

36

[SR31990( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011363-A

*[SR32000( BC )04/95] NOTE: The belt webbing below the tongue isthe lap belt portion of the combinationlap/shoulder belt, and the belt webbingabove the tongue is the shoulder beltportion of the combinationlap/shoulder belt.

*[SR32010( BC )04/95] 2. With your other hand, grasp the tip (metalportion) of the tongue (not the cover) andslide the tongue up the webbing as far as itwill go. See Figure 1. Release the tongue, butdo not let go of the lap portion of the beltwebbing.

*[SR32020( BC )04/95] 3. While still holding the belt webbing belowthe tongue in one hand, use your other handto grasp the tip (metal portion) of the tongueand belt webbing together, and again pullout as much of the belt as possible. Then, letgo of the lap portion of the belt webbing.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

37

*[SR32030( BC )04/95] 4. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue andwebbing through the child seat according tothe child seat manufacturer’s instructions.See Figure 2. Be sure that the belt webbingis not twisted.

*[SR32040( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011364-A

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

38

*[SR32050( BC )04/95] 5. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor that seating position until you hear asnap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongueis securely latched to the buckle by pullingon the tongue. See Figure 3.

*[SR32060( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011365-A

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

39

*[SR32070( BC )04/95] 6. Push down on the child seat and pull up onthe shoulder belt portion to tighten the lapbelt portion of the combination lap andshoulder belt. See Figure 4.

*[SR32080( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011366-A

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

40

*[SR32090( BC )04/95] 7. Grasp belt close to child seat and pull on theshoulder belt portion of the combinationlap/shoulder belt, then allow the belt toretract and remove all slack to securelytighten the child safety seat in the vehicle.See Figure 5.

*[SR32100( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011367-A

*[SR32110( BC )04/95] 8. Before placing the child into the child seat,forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-sideand in forward directions to make sure thatthe seat is held securely in place. See Figures6 and 7. If the child seat moves excessively,repeat steps 6 through 8, or properly installthe child seat in a different seating position.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

41

[SR32120( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011368-A

*[SR32130( BC )05/95]

half page art:0011369-A

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

42

*[SR32140( BC )04/95] 9. Check from time to time to be sure thatthere is no slack in the lap/shoulder belt.The shoulder belt must be snug to keep thelap belt tight during a collision.

% [SR32150( BCGV)03/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the RearCenter Seating Position with AdjustableLap Belt

[SR32160( BCGV)03/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,hold the tongue so that its bottom isperpendicular to the direction of webbingwhile sliding the tongue up the webbing.

[SR32170( BCGV)03/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the centerseating position.

[SR32180( BCGV)03/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

[SR32190( BCGV)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the center seating position until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

[SR32200( BCGV)03/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pullingon the loose end of the lap belt webbing totighten the belt.

[SR32210( BCGV)03/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-sideand in forward direction to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. If the childseat moves excessively, repeat steps 5through 6, or properly install the child seatin a different position.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

43

%*[SR38300( ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children

*[SR38400( ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seatsshould always wear safety belts. (See instructionswith your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,to determine maximum size of child that willsafely fit in the seat.)

*[SR38500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If safety belts are not properly worn andadjusted as described, the risk of seriousinjury to the child in a collision will bemuch greater.

*[SR38600(MBCG )05/95] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap andshoulder belts can be positioned so that it doesnot cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of thevehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.

*[SR38700( BC )03/95] RWARNING

If the shoulder belt cannot be properlypositioned, the child should sit in thecenter rear seat and use the lap belt.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

44

*[SR38830( ALL)04/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts onchildren who have outgrown child safety seats,Ford recommends use of a belt-positioningbooster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards.Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child andprovide a shorter, firmer seating cushion thatencourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. Abelt-positioning booster should be used if theshoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face orneck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly onboth thighs, or if the thighs are too short to letthe child sit all the way back on the seat cushionwhen the lower legs hang over the edge of theseat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with yourpediatrician.

*[SR38860( ALL)04/95] RWARNING

Do not use a belt-positioning booster witha lap-only belt.

*[SR38900( ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap andshoulder belts should always be worn snuglyand below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.

*[SR39000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, children should always ride withthe seatback upright.

File:rcsrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:53:31 1996

45

Starting Your Thunderbird

*[ST03400( ALL)03/95] Ignition%*[ST03500( ALL)01/95] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

[ST03750( ALL)12/94]

quarter page art:0010035-B

The positions of the key in the ignition

%*[ST03901( BCGV)03/95] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

% [ST04001( ALL)12/94] LOCK locks the steering wheel. It also locks theautomatic transmission gearshift lever.

*[ST04101( ALL)01/95] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

*[ST04200( ALL)03/95] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and allaccessories without locking the steering wheel orthe automatic transmission gearshift lever.

*[ST04300( ALL)03/95] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) tomake sure they work before you start theengine. The key returns to the ON position oncethe engine is started and remains in this positionwhile the engine runs.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

46

*[ST04400( ALL)03/95] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake warning light.

%*[ST04900( ALL)02/95] Removing the Key From the Ignition

*[ST05600( BCGV)03/95] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[ST05800( ALL)01/95] 2. Set the parking brake fully.

*[ST05900( BCGV)03/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[ST06050( BCGV)03/95] 4. Remove the key.

[ST06660( BCGV)03/95] NOTE: The automatic transmission gearshiftmust be in P (Park) to move the key tothe lock position.

%*[ST06675( ALL)05/95] If the key is stuck in the LOCK position, movethe steering wheel left or right until the keyturns freely.

%*[ST06700( ALL)03/95] If the driver’s door is open while the key is stillin the ignition, a warning chime sounds.

*[ST06825( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park).

*[ST06875( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets alone in your vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of thevehicle. Further, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere and possibly fatal injuries topeople as well as animals.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

47

%*[ST07000( ALL)03/95] Fuel-Injected Engines

*[ST07100( ALL)03/95] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the mostimportant thing to remember is to avoidpressing down on the accelerator before orduring starting. Only use the accelerator whenyou have problems getting your vehicle started.See Starting Your Engine in this chapter fordetails about when to use the accelerator whileyou start your vehicle.

*[ST07300( ALL)03/95] Starting Your Vehicle%*[ST07400( ALL)05/94] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle

*[ST07500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

*[ST07600( ALL)01/95] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[ST07700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure you and all your passengersbuckle your safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[ST07800( ALL)03/95] 2. Make sure the headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off when starting.

*[ST08100( BCGV)03/95] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)and the parking brake is set before you turnthe key.

*[ST08400( ALL)03/95] Before you start your vehicle, you should testthe warning lights on the instrument panel tomake sure that they work. Refer to the WarningLights and Gauges chapter.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

48

%*[ST10300( ALL)02/95] Starting Your Engine

*[ST10325( ALL)02/95] To start your engine:

*[ST10350( ALL)05/95] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[ST10353( ALL)03/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[ST10357( ALL)03/95] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.

*[ST10360( ALL)02/95] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[ST10370( ALL)02/95] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[ST10430( ALL)04/95] For a cold engine:

*[ST10440( ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[ST10450( ALL)04/95] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[ST10460( ALL)04/95] For a warm engine:

*[ST10470( ALL)04/95] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

49

*[ST10473( ALL)04/95] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter or flood the engine.

*[ST10476( ALL)04/95] After you start the engine, let it idle for a fewseconds. Keep your foot on the brake pedal andput the gearshift lever in gear. Release theparking brake. Slowly release the brake pedaland drive away in the normal manner.

[ST10478( ALL)12/94] NOTE: Your vehicle has an interlock thatprevents you from shifting out ofP (Park) unless your foot is on thebrake pedal.

%*[ST10480( ALL)04/95] If the engine does not start after two attempts:

*[ST10492( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST10494( ALL)04/95] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[ST10496( ALL)04/95] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[ST10497( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[ST10498( ALL)04/95] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up. Then drive away in thenormal manner.

*[ST10500( ALL)04/95] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been triggered. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch later in this chapter.

%*[ST11100( ALL)04/95] A computer system controls the engine’s idlespeed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidle speed normally runs higher than when it’swarmed up. These faster engine speeds willmake your vehicle move slightly faster than itsnormal idle speed. It should, however, slowdown after a short time. If it does not, have theidle speed checked.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

50

*[ST11210( ALL)05/95] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.

*[ST11225( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.

*[ST11250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[ST11300( ALL)03/95] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzerotemperatures, use an engine block heater(if your vehicle has this option).

%*[ST11400( ALL)03/95] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)(Standard in Canada)

*[ST11500( ALL)03/95] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reach-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allowsthe heater-defrost system to respond quickly.

*[ST11700( ALL)02/95] To turn the heater on, simply plug it into agrounded 110-volt outlet. Ford recommends thatyou use a 110-volt circuit that is protected by aground fault circuit interrupter.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

51

*[ST11800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.

*[ST11900( ALL)03/95] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.

*[ST12000( ALL)12/91] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine blockheater before driving your vehicle.

%*[ST13100( ALL)02/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[ST13200( ALL)02/95] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

*[ST13300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or other enclosed area. Never sit ina stopped vehicle for more than a shortperiod of time with the engine running.Exhaust fumes are toxic. See GuardingAgainst Exhaust Fumes in this chapter formore instructions.

*[ST13400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

52

*[ST13500( ALL)01/95] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[ST13600( ALL)02/95] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[ST13700( ALL)02/95] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[ST13800( ALL)01/95] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[ST13900( ALL)01/95] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

[ST14000( ALL)12/94] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, theheating or air conditioning system should be setto any function except MAX A/C or AUTO.

[ST14125( BCGV)05/94] ❑ If you use the heater, set the fan speed onMEDIUM or HIGH with the function controlon any position except OFF and thetemperature control at any desired position.

[ST14250( BCGV)12/88] ❑ If you use the air conditioner, set the fanspeed on MEDIUM or HIGH with thefunction control on any position except OFFor MAX and the temperature control at anydesired position.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

53

%*[ST17100( ALL)03/95] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

%*[ST17110( ALL)04/95] Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ST17200( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start after a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device intended to stop the fuelpump when your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[ST17400( BCGV)01/95] Once the shut-off switch is triggered, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle. The switch is on the left side of thetrunk.

[ST17700( BC )05/94]

one third page art:0010013-E

The fuel pump shut-off switch

*[ST18700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

54

*[ST18800( ALL)03/95] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

*[ST18900( ALL)04/95] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[ST19000( ALL)03/95] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[ST19100( ALL)03/95] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button down. If the button is alreadyset, you may have a different mechanicalproblem.

*[ST19200( ALL)03/95] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position fora few seconds, then turn it to the OFFposition.

*[ST19300( ALL)03/95] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

*[ST19350( ALL)03/95] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights beforedriving the vehicle.

*[ST19400( ALL)01/95] Pushing[ST19600( BCGV)03/95] Vehicles with automatic transmissions cannot be

started by pushing. Follow the directions underIf Your Vehicle Needs a Jump-Start.

File:rcstb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:52:09 1996

55

Warning Lights andGauges

*[LG00400( ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on yourvehicle is divided into several different sections.The illustrations on the following pages showthe major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shownmay not be on all vehicles.

[LG00500( BCGV)05/94] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gaugesare grouped together in the instrument clusterand the indicator lamp module.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

56

%[LG02200(BC)05/95]

fullpageart:0010109-P

Mech

anical

cluster

File:rclgb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

57

*[LG02700( BCGV)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster

*[LG02800( BCGV)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are onthe mechanical cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. Some of the lights listed areoptional. The following sections detail what eachof these indicators means.

%*[LG02900( ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light

*[LG03000( ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked by aqualified service technician.

[LG03025( BC )07/93]

one inch art:0010116-D

[LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake isset, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to START. It normallygoes off shortly after the engine starts and yourelease the parking brake. If the light stays onafter you have fully released the parking brake,have the hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

58

% [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light(If equipped)

[LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time youstart your vehicle. If it remains on for longerthan five seconds, you should shut off yourengine and restart. If the anti-lock brake lightstays on, this indicates that the anti-lock featureis disabled and should receive immediateattention by a qualified service technician.Normal braking is not affected unless the brakewarning light is also lit.

*[LG03505( BCGV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-checkcapabilities. As previously described, the systemturns on the anti-lock light each time you startyour engine. After the engine is started and theanti-lock light is out, the system performsanother test the first time the vehicle reaches14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor forapproximately 1/2 second. At this time amechanical noise may be heard. This is a normalpart of the self-check feature. If a malfunction isfound during this check the anti-lock light willcome on.

[LG03680( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0011194-B

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

59

*[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

[LG03800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[LG04300( ALL)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

*[LG04305( ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. The following conditionswill take place:

[LG04317( BC )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the keyis turned to the ON position, the light willcome on for 1 to 2 minutes and the chimewill sound for 4 to 8 seconds.

*[LG04320(MBC )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light ison and the chime is sounding, both the lightand chime will turn off.

[LG04340( BC )03/95] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before the key isturned to the ON position, the light willcome on for 1 to 2 minutes.

[LG04600( ALL)05/92]

one inch art:0010118-A

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

60

%*[LG04610( ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light

[LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light toindicate the condition of the system. If thesystem is functioning properly, the light willstay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

[LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two thingsmay happen: the readiness light will either flashor stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound.If either of these things happen, have the air bagsystem serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer immediately.

[LG04645( BC )05/95]

one inch art:0011355-A

%*[LG04700( ALL)01/95] Charging System Light

*[LG04800( ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

[LG04900( ALL)05/92]

one inch art:0010119-A

*[LG05100( ALL)02/95] This light comes on every time you turn theignition to the ON or START position (engineoff). The light should go off when the enginestarts and the alternator begins to charge.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

61

*[LG05200( ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

%*[LG05205( BCGV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator

[LG05210( ALL)06/93]

one inch art:0010730-A

*[LG05220( BCGV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission ControlSwitch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has beenpushed. When the light is on, the transmissionwill not shift into overdrive. Depressing thebutton on the shifter will return the vehicle to“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will bein the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle isstarted even if the O/D OFF mode was selectedwhen the vehicle was last shut off.

*[LG05230( ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when theTCS is depressed or if the light flasheswhen you are driving, have yourvehicle serviced at the firstopportunity. If this condition persists,damage could occur to thetransmission.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

62

%*[LG07200( ALL)01/95] High Beam Light

*[LG07300( ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

[LG07400( ALL)05/92]

one inch art:0010125-A

% [LG08300( BC )07/93] Check Gauges Warning Light (if equipped)

[LG08310( BC )03/93]

one inch art:0010128-D

*[LG08400( BC )06/94] This light will come on when the key is in theON position and the:

[LG08500( BC )04/89] ❑engine coolant temperature gauge is high, or

[LG08600( BC )04/89] ❑engine oil pressure gauge is low, or

[LG08700( BC )05/95] ❑when the fuel tank has reached emptyreserve.

[LG08825( BC )03/90] This light serves as a reminder for you to checkthe engine coolant temperature gauge, theengine oil pressure gauge or the fuel gauge. Itwill come on if there is a condition that needsyour attention.

[LG08850( BC )07/93] See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge, Engine OilPressure Gauge, or Fuel Gauge in this chapter formore information.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

63

%*[LG11005( ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light

*[LG11015( ALL)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)system consists of the hardware and softwarenecessary to monitor the operation of thepowertrain. The OBD II system is designed tocheck the function of the vehicle’s powertraincontrol system during normal operation. If anemission problem is detected, the Check EngineWarning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.

*[LG11020( ALL)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle maycause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.Additions such as burglar alarms, cellularphones, and CB radios must be carefullyinstalled. Do not install these devices by tappinginto or running wires close to powertrain controlsystem wires or components.

*[LG11050( ALL)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON, but it should turn off whenthe engine starts. If the light does not come onwhen you turn the ignition to ON or if it comeson and stays on when you are driving, haveyour vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Thisindicates a possible problem with one of thevehicle’s emission control systems. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

*[LG11055( ALL)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) secondintervals while you are driving the vehicle, itmeans that the engine is misfiring. If thiscondition persists, damage could occur to theengine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. You do notneed to have your vehicle towed in.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

64

*[LG11060( ALL)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasionswhile you are driving, it means that amalfunction occurred and the condition correcteditself.

*[LG11065( ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itselfoccurs when an engine running out of fuelbegins to misfire. In this case, the Check EngineWarning Light may turn on and will then set aDiagnostic Trouble Code indicating that theengine was misfiring while the last of the fuelwas being consumed. After refueling, the CheckEngine Warning Light will turn off after thevehicle has completed three consecutive warmup cycles without a misfire condition occurring.A warm up cycle consists of engine start from acold condition (engine at ambient temperature)and running until the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

*[LG11075( ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check EngineWarning Light will turn off as soon as theengine begins to crank. It is not necessary tohave the engine serviced.

*[LG11100( BCGV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check EngineWarning Light may come on if the fuel cap isnot properly installed. If the Check EngineWarning Light comes on and you suspect thatthe fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off theroad as soon as it is safely possible and turn offthe engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,making sure it is properly seated.

*[LG11200( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm upcycles and on the fourth engine start up, theCheck Engine Warning Light should turn off. Ifthe light does not go off after the fourth enginerestart, have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer or a qualified technician.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

65

%*[LG12910( ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights

*[LG12920( ALL)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate thedirection in which you are going to be turning.

[LG12950( ALL)06/93]

one inch art:0010525-A

%*[LG13000( ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge

[LG13025( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011340-A

The fuel gauge

[LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gaugeindication after adding fuel, turn the ignitionswitch OFF while refueling the vehicle.

[LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whenthe vehicle is in motion. The most accuratereading is obtained with the vehicle on levelground.

*[LG13200( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gaugeindicator may drift from the ignition switch ONposition.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

66

%*[LG13400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[LG13550( ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

[LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark intothe NORMAL band as your engine coolantwarms up. Under normal driving conditions, thepointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It isacceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within theNORMAL band under normal drivingconditions, and under certain driving conditionssuch as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving uphills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate atthe top of the NORMAL band.

[LG13650( ALL)05/94] If, under any circumstances, the pointer movesabove the NORMAL band, the engine isoverheating and continued operation may causeengine damage.

% [LG13730( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011144-C

The engine coolant temperature gauge

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

67

*[LG14100( ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:

*[LG14200( ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG14300( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[LG14400( ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVECOOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTILTHE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[LG14500( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine, see Engine Coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

*[LG14600( ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have thecoolant system serviced.

%*[LG14800( ALL)01/95] Speedometer

[LG14825( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011341-A

The speedometer

*[LG14900( ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

%*[LG15000( ALL)01/95] Odometer

*[LG15100( ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

68

%*[LG15200( ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer

*[LG15300( ALL)03/93] If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simplyset the trip odometer to zero by pressing thereset button firmly when beginning the distanceyou wish to measure.

*[LG15350( ALL)01/95] Since the trip odometer displays distanceindependent of the odometer it will not alwaysadvance to the next mile (kilometer) at the sametime as the odometer.

%*[LG15450(MBC )02/95] Tachometer

[LG15470( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011342-A

The tachometer

*[LG15600(MBC )01/95] The tachometer displays the approximate enginerevolutions per minute (rpm), or how fast theengine is running.

*[LG15900( BC )01/95] You can drive your vehicle at most rpm pointson the tachometer but you must stay out of thered zone.

[LG16000( BC )03/90] Regardless of the type of transmission in yourvehicle, if you drive with the tachometer pointerin the red zone, you may damage the engine.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

69

% [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped)

*[LG16225( ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage whenthe ignition key is in the ON position.

*[LG16230( ALL)05/94] If the battery is operating under cold weatherconditions, the pointer may indicate in the upperrange of the NORMAL band while the battery ischarging. If you are running electrical accessories(when the engine is off, or idling at a lowspeed), the pointer may move toward the lowerend of the NORMAL band.

*[LG16260( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as itis safely possible.

[LG16285( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0010655-D

Battery voltage gauge

%*[LG16300( ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

[LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, notthe oil level. However, if your engine’s oil levelis low, it could affect the oil pressure. With theengine running, the pointer should move intothe NORMAL band. If the pointer drops belowthe NORMAL band while the engine is running,you have lost oil pressure and continuedoperation will cause severe engine damage.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

70

[LG16550( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011146-B

Engine oil pressure gauge

*[LG16600( ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[LG16700( ALL)01/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[LG16800( ALL)04/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severeengine damage could result.

[LG16900( ALL)05/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you donot follow these instructions, you or otherscould be injured. To assure an accuratereading, your car should be on level ground.

[LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessarybefore you start the engine again. Do notoverfill. Do not operate the engine if thepointer is below the NORMAL band,regardless of the oil level. Contact yournearest dealer for further service actions.

[LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, seeEngine Oil Recommendations in the Index.

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

71

% [LG17205( BC )03/95] Indicator Lamp Module(If equipped)

[LG17208( BC )05/94] The following warning lights are on theindicator lamp module. All of the warning lightsalert you to possible problems. Some of thelights listed are optional. The following sectiondetails what each of these indicators mean.

[LG17210( BC )03/95]

one third page art:0011215-A

The indicator lamp module

% [LG17215( BC )04/95] Door Ajar Light (If equipped)

[LG17220( BC )06/92] This light tells you when any door is notcompletely shut. It glows when the key is in theON position.

[LG17225( BC )03/94]

one inch art:0010126-B

The door ajar light

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

72

% [LG17230( BC )07/93] Low Coolant Light[LG17235( BC )07/93] This light indicates that the level of the engine

coolant is low inside the coolant recovery bottleand that you should add more coolant. SeeEngine Coolant in the Index.

[LG17240( BC )07/93]

one inch art:0011209-A

The low coolant light

%*[LG17250( BC )07/93] Low Fuel Light[LG17255( BC )05/95] This light comes on when your fuel gauge

indicates approximately 1/16 of a tank. Your carmust be turned to ON for this light to come on.This light will either flicker or glow steadily.

[LG17260( BC )07/93]

one inch art:0011210-A

The low fuel light

% [LG17265( BC )07/93] Washer Fluid Low Light

*[LG17270( BC )02/95] This light comes on if the reservoir is less than aquarter full when you turn on the windshieldwashers.

[LG17275( BC )07/93]

one inch art:0011211-A

The low washer fluid light

File:rclgb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:57 1996

73

Instru

men

tP

anel

Con

trols

[IP00270(BC)05/94]

fullpageart:0010101-K

Th

ein

strum

ent

pan

el

File:rcipb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

74

[IP00400( ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system,clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.

%*[IP00500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases thegloss (shine) of the upper part of theinstrument panel should be avoided.The dull finish in this area is to helpprotect the driver from undesirablewindshield reflection.

%*[IP00600( ALL)01/95] The Climate Control Systems[IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate

control systems. The two systems are:

[IP01200( BCGV)06/93] ❑a manual heating and air conditioning system

[IP01250( BC )03/95] ❑a semi-automatic temperature controlsystem (if equipped)

*[IP01400( ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehiclehas, see the diagrams on the following pages.

% [IP10700( BCGV)08/93] The Manual Heating and Air ConditioningSystem

[IP10800( BCGV)08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrostthe windshield, and turn on the air conditioningwith the three knobs in the center of theinstrument panel:

[IP10900( BCGV)08/93] ❑FAN

[IP11000( BCGV)08/93] ❑TEMP

[IP11100( BCGV)08/93] ❑SELECT

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

75

[IP11300( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0011216-B

The knobs that control the manual heating and airconditioning system

[IP11501( BC )05/95] To heat the interior of your vehicle, turn theSELECT knob to FLOOR, turn the TEMP knobto the end of the red range (full right) and turnthe FAN knob to HI. Temperature and fan speedcan be adjusted as desired.

% [IP11700( BC )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows,turn the SELECT knob to defrost V, turn theTEMP knob to the end of the red range(full right) and turn the FAN knob to HI.Temperature and fan speed can be adjusted asdesired.

[IP11901( BC )05/95] To heat the interior and defrost the windshieldand side windows, at the same time, turn theSELECT knob to FLOOR & DEF, turn the TEMPknob to the end of the red range (full right) andturn the FAN knob to HI.

[IP12100( BC )03/94] To direct either heated or cooled air to the panelregisters and the floor at the same time, turn theSELECT knob to PANEL & FLOOR, turn theTEMP knob for the temperature desired and setthe fan speed as desired.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

76

[IP12300( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle using outside air, turn theSELECT knob to A/C, turn the TEMP knob allthe way to the end of the blue range (full left)and turn the FAN knob to the desired speedbetween LO and HI. A/C provides quietersystem operation than MAX A/C, but it is notas efficient as MAX A/C which uses recirculatedair.

% [IP12500( BC )05/95] To ventilate your car with outside air, duringmild weather, turn the SELECT knob to PANEL,turn the TEMP knob for the temperature desiredand set the FAN knob to the speed desired.

[IP12700( BC )08/93] Under normal conditions, the SELECT knobshould be left in any position other than MAXA/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. Thisallows the vehicle to “breathe” through theoutside air inlet duct.

[IP12900( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle quickly in warm weather,turn the SELECT knob to MAX A/C, turn theTEMP knob all the way to the end of the bluerange (full left) and turn the FAN knob to HI.MAX A/C uses recirculated air and is the mostfuel efficient way to cool your vehicle and canalso be used in heavy traffic to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the vehicle. MAX A/C canalso be used in high humidity areas for moreefficient operation.

[IP13100( BC )08/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm,drive for the first few minutes with the windowsopen. This forces most of the hot, stale air out ofthe vehicle and allows the air conditioning towork faster.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

77

% [IP13300( BCGV)01/89] Adjusting the panel register airflow

[IP13400( BCGV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjustedto your comfort needs. The thumbwheel controlsthe volume of air and the knob in the center ofthe register controls direction up or down orside to side.

[IP13500( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0010183-D

Controlling the airflow from panel registers

% [IP13600( BC )03/95] The Semi Automatic Temperature ControlSystem (If equipped)

[IP13700( BC )03/95] System Characteristics

[IP13800( BC )03/95] The Semi Automatic Temperature ControlSystem (SATC) is designed to provide comfortconsistent with the temperature setting youselect. The discharge air temperature and fanspeed will be automatically controlled to bringthe vehicle to the desired set temperature, as fastas possible, and then gradually be changed tomaintain that temperature. The system also givesyou the capability of manually adjusting thelocation of the discharge air and fan speed fordesired comfort or specific operatingrequirements.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

78

[IP13900( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0010662-D

The controls for the Semi-Automatic Temperature Controlsystem

[IP14000( BC )03/95] System Controls

[IP14100( BC )03/95] Digital display

[IP14200( BC )07/93] The temperature you select for your drivingcomfort is displayed here. You can change thetemperature by pressing either the COOL or theWARM button. You may also display outsidetemperature for four seconds by depressing theOUTSIDE TEMP button.

[IP14300( BC )03/95] Cool button

[IP14400( BC )07/93] This button is used to LOWER the temperaturesetting. Press the button once to lower thedisplayed temperature one degree. Holding thebutton in will continuously reduce thetemperature setting in one degree incrementsuntil you either release it or 65˚F (18˚C) isreached.

[IP14500( BC )05/94] If the button is pressed after 65˚F (18˚C) isreached, only 60˚F (16˚C) will be displayed andthe system will provide continuous maximumcooling.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

79

[IP14600( BC )03/95] Warm button

[IP14700( BC )07/93] This button is used to RAISE the temperaturesetting. Press the button once to raise thedisplayed temperature one degree. Holding thebutton in will continuously increase thetemperature setting in one degree incrementsuntil you either release it or 85˚F (29˚C) isreached.

[IP14800( BC )03/94] If the button is pressed after 85˚F (29˚C) isreached, only 90˚F (32˚C) will be displayed andthe system will provide continuous maximumheating.

[IP14900( BC )03/95] System Operation

[IP15000( BC )05/95] To heat the inside of your vehicle, turn theSELECT knob to FLOOR and turn the FANknob to AUTO. The fan will remain off until theengine reaches operating temperature or until3-1/2 minutes have elapsed. As the interior ofyour vehicle warms up, the discharge airtemperature and the fan speed will beautomatically and gradually changed to maintainthe set temperature. If you prefer a fixed fanspeed, turn the fan speed switch to the desiredsetting.

% [IP15100( BC )05/95] To defrost the windshield and side windows,turn the SELECT knob to Defrost V, turn theFAN knob to HI and set the temperature asnecessary to clear the windshield.

[IP15200( BC )07/93] To direct either cooled or heated air to the panelregisters and the floor at the same time, turn theSELECT knob to PANEL & FLOOR, push theCOOL or WARM button for the desiredtemperature and set the FAN speed as desired.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

80

[IP15300( BC )05/95] To cool your car quickly in warm weather, turnthe SELECT knob to MAX A/C and turn theFAN knob to AUTO. As the vehicle interiorcools down, the discharge air temperature andfan speed will automatically and gradually bechanged to maintain the set temperature withairflow from the instrument panel registers.

[IP15400( BC )07/93] If the interior of your vehicle is very warm,drive for the first few minutes with the windowsopen. This will force the hot, stale air out andallow the air conditioning to work faster.

% [IP15500( BC )05/95] To cool your vehicle with outside air, turn theSELECT knob to A/C and turn the FAN knob toAUTO or to a fixed speed setting as you desire.Cooling your vehicle in this manner provides aquieter system operation, but it will not cool asefficiently and is not as fuel efficient as MAXA/C which uses recirculated air.

[IP15600( BC )05/95] To ventilate your vehicle with outside air, turnthe SELECT knob to PANEL and the FAN knobto AUTO. The fan will remain off until theengine is warm enough to provide heat.However, if the interior temperature is above theset temperature, the fan will turn onimmediately. Temperature may be set as desiredand FAN speed can be selected.

[IP15700( BC )07/93] A/C compressor override

[IP15800( BC )03/94] The A/C compressor can be disengaged formore economical driving. This can be done byturning the SELECT knob to PANEL. The A/Ccompressor is automatically engaged by thecontrol in MAX A/C, NORM A/C, FLOOR &DEF, and DEFROST positions if the outsidetemperature is above 45˚F (7˚C).

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

81

% [IP31700(MBC )05/95] Rear Window Defroster(If equipped)

*[IP32000( ALL)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outsideof the rear window.

[IP32600( BC )01/89] The button for the rear window defroster islocated on the lower right side of the instrumentpanel, just left of the climate control panel.

[IP32700( BC )06/93]

one third page art:0010190-B

The button that controls the rear window defroster

[IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rearwindow before using the defroster. With theengine running, push the defrost button.

[IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defrosterwill turn off. If the window is still not clear,turn the defroster on again.

[IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition keyis turned to the OFF position.

*[IP33300( ALL)02/95] The heating elements are bonded to the inside ofthe rear window. Do not use sharp objects toscrape the inside of the rear window or useabrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so coulddamage the heating elements.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

82

%*[IP34200( ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[IP34310( ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System

*[IP34312( ALL)03/95] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[IP34320( ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turnsthe high beam headlamps on, with a reducedlight output, when:

*[IP34325( ALL)03/95] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position,and

*[IP34330( ALL)03/95] ❑The vehicle is running, and

*[IP34340( ALL)01/95] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parkingbrake.

*[IP34360( BCGV)01/95] NOTE: If you have a vehicle with anautomatic lighting system, the DRLsystem is active until the automaticsystem turns on the headlamps.

*[IP34363( ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turnon in the flash-to-pass mode duringnighttime driving.

*[IP34365( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flickerwhen the vehicle is turned on or off.This is a normal condition.

*[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemwill not illuminate the tail lamps andparking lamps. Turn on your headlampsat dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

83

%*[IP34370( ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights

*[IP34550( BCGV)05/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, sidemarkers, and tail lamps, use the rotary knob thatis to the left of the steering wheel.

[IP35000( BC )05/95]

half page art:0010195-D

The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps(shown with autolamp feature — other models similar)

[IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parkinglamps, tail lamps, and side markersautomatically turn on. But you can turn on theparking lamps, tail lamps, and side markerswithout turning on the headlamps.

*[IP36100( ALL)01/95] For more information about how the high beamswork, refer to the Steering Column Controlschapter.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

84

[IP36130( BCGV)05/95] Chime for headlamps on

*[IP36160( BCGV)05/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

%*[IP36200( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[IP36300( ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solventsor abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as thesemay cause scratches or crack the lamps.

%*[IP36900( BC )02/95] Setting the Autolamp Delay System(If equipped)

*[IP37100( BCGV)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on andoff automatically. You can use the autolamp to:

*[IP37300( BCGV)01/95] ❑ turn on the lamps automatically at night

*[IP37400( BCGV)01/95] ❑ turn off the lamps automatically duringdaylight

*[IP37500( BCGV)01/95] ❑keep the lamps on for up to three minutesafter you turn the key to OFF.

[IP37900( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0010199-D

The controls for the autolamp

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

85

*[IP38200( BC )01/95] To set the autolamp:

*[IP38300( BC )05/95] 1. Make sure the headlamp knob is in the OFFposition. If the knob for the headlamps isON, you cancel the autolamp.

*[IP38400( BC )01/95] 2. Turn the ignition key to ON or start yourvehicle.

[IP38500( BC )06/93] 3. Find the autolamp thumbwheel to the rightof the panel dim thumbwheel.

[IP38900( BC )11/92] 4. Turn the thumbwheel up to the beginning ofthe MAX position (within the DELAY range).

*[IP39200( BC )01/95] 5. The autolamp automatically turns the lampson and off for you.

*[IP39275( BCGV)01/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocellthat is located in the top left corner of theinstrument panel. This photocell controls theautolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts asif it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.

*[IP39300( BC )01/95] To turn the autolamp off, move the thumbwheelback to OFF.

*[IP39500( BCGV)12/92] You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay onfor up to three minutes after you turn yourvehicle off.

[IP39600( BC )12/94] To keep the lamps on after you leave yourvehicle, turn the thumbwheel as far into theMAX range as you want.

[IP40000( BC )12/94] If you move the thumbwheel only slightly intothe DELAY area, your lamps will stay on foronly a moment after you turn your vehicle off.The further you move the thumbwheel into theDELAY area (toward the MAX position), thelonger the lamps will stay on after you turnyour vehicle off.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

86

%*[IP44500( ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and InstrumentPanel

[IP44700( BC )01/89] Manual operation

*[IP44810( BC )05/95] With the light knob in the parking lamps or theheadlamps position, you can brighten or dim thelights in the instrument panel. To do this, usethe thumbwheel to the left of the steering wheel.This wheel also turns on the interior lights withthe light knob on or off.

[IP45100( BC )06/93]

half page art:0010206-C

The thumbwheel controls the light on the instrument paneland the interior light

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

87

[IP45450( BCGV)07/93] Using the Automatic Illuminated EntrySystem (If equipped)

[IP45600( BCGV)03/91] The interior lights turn on when you lift theoutside door handle on either front door, whenany button of the keyless entry system is pushedor when you press UNLOCK, TRUNK, orPANIC on a programmed remote entrytransmitter if your vehicle is equipped withremote entry.

[IP45900( BCGV)01/89] These lights automatically turn off after 25seconds or when you turn the ignition key toON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off ifyou have turned them on manually or if a dooris open.

[IP46000( BCGV)01/89] Tips on the illuminated entry system:

[IP46100( BCGV)01/89] ❑The illuminated entry timer will not turn offthe courtesy lamp if that lamp has beenturned on manually or by the door switch.

[IP46200( BCGV)01/89] ❑Occasionally, you will need to clean the lensof the door lock assembly. Use FordMulti-Purpose Cleaner Concentrate, a mildsoap, or household ammonia and watersolution. Apply with a soft cloth or cottonswab, followed by a clear water rinse.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

88

%*[IP46300( ALL)01/95] Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps

*[IP46425( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle has two map lamps for thepassenger and the driver. To turn on the maplamps, push the switch next to each lamp.

[IP46750( BC )07/93]

one third page art:0011214-A

Map lamp (with optional moon roof)

[IP46760( BC )07/93]

one third page art:0010651-C

Front seat map and dome lamps (without optional moonroof)

*[IP47010( ALL)01/95] The dual beam map lamps are located on eachside of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can beturned on by the switches on the lamp.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

89

% [IP47220( BC )11/92] Rear Seat Courtesy Lamps

[IP47250( BC )03/91] Your vehicle has rear seat courtesy lamps whichare activated when the interior lights are turnedon. These lamps are located on the quarter trimpanels.

%*[IP47270( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[IP47290( ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps areplastic and should be cleaned with a milddetergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clearwater.

%*[IP47300( ALL)03/95] Clock[IP47460( BC )05/95]

quarter page art:0011164-B

The digital clock

[IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the Hbutton. When the desired hour appears,release the button.

[IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the Mbutton. When the desired minute appears,release the button.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

90

%*[IP49400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens

*[IP49500( ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft clothand a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-ClearSpray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not usepaper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean thelens as these may cause scratches.

File:rcipb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:51:01 1996

91

Steering Column Controls

*[SC00200( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheelare designed to give you easy access to thecontrols while you are driving.

%*[SC00300( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever

*[SC00400( ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

[SC00500( ALL)03/95] ❑operate the turn signals

*[SC00600( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[SC00700( ALL)01/95] ❑ flash the lights

*[SC00800( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washeron/off

[SC01900( ALL)02/95]

one third page art:0011292-A

The turn signal lever

%*[SC02100( ALL)01/95] Turn Signals

*[SC02201( ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Moveit down to signal a left turn. The correspondingindicator light in the instrument cluster willflash.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

92

*[SC02301( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, movethe lever back to the center (off) position.

*[SC02401( ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough tosignal but not to latch. The lever will return tothe off position when you release it.

%*[SC02700( ALL)03/95] High Beams

*[SC02800( ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlampcontrol knob to the headlamp ON position andpush the turn signal lever away from you untilit latches. When the high beams are ON, thehigh beam indicator light on the instrumentpanel comes on.

*[SC02900( ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the levertoward you until it latches. The high beamindicator light turns off.

*[SC02950( B )01/95] NOTE: When the headlamps are on low beam,the outer two headlamps are on. Whenthe headlamps are on high beam, thetwo outer headlamps will turn off andthe inner headlamps turn on.

%*[SC03200( ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights

*[SC03300( ALL)05/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever towardyou for a moment and then release it. Theheadlamps will flash whether the headlampknob is in the on or off position.

%*[SC03500( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[SC03600( ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you toactivate the wipers. The first seven detents areinterval wipe positions, the eighth detent is theLO position and the ninth detent is the HIposition.

*[SC03800( ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob towardyou to the OFF position.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

93

%*[SC04100( ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers

*[SC04205( ALL)01/95] In addition to two speed wipers, your vehiclehas wipers that you can set to operate atvarying intervals. For example, you can set theinterval so they wipe less often when it drizzlesor more often in heavier rain.

[SC04700( ALL)02/95]

one third page art:0011293-A

The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever

*[SC04900( ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom you until the wipers are going at thedesired interval.

*[SC05300( ALL)04/95] Windshield Washer

*[SC05401( ALL)01/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knobpushed in. After you release the knob, thewipers operate for two to three cycles beforeturning off (if the wipers were OFF) orreturning to HI, LO, or the interval settingselected.

*[SC05500( ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washerfluid level and fill it if it is low. See the ServicingYour Thunderbird chapter. If there is enoughfluid, consult your nearest Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

94

*[SC05600( ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.

*[SC05700( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

In freezing weather, the washer solutionmay freeze on the windshield and obscureyour vision. Always warm up thewindshield with the defroster before youuse the washer fluid. If you cannot seethrough the windshield clearly, it canincrease the risk of being involved in acollision.

*[SC05800( ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.

%*[SC05810( ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher[SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations,

push in the hazard flasher on the top of thesteering column. The same switch turns theflashers off.

*[SC05830( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery can be drained.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

95

[SC05860( BCGV)08/93]

one third page art:0010216-B

The control switch for the hazard flashers

%*[SC05900( ALL)01/95] Horn

*[SC06000( ALL)04/95] To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

[SC06100( BC )06/93]

half page art:0001012-B

The horn on the steering wheel

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

96

%*[SC07300( ALL)01/95] Tilt Steering

*[SC07400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is moving.

[SC07700(MBC )03/93]

half page art:0010088-B

The lever to tilt the steering wheel

*[SC08000( ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,pull the release lever on the column toward you.Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the steering wheel inplace.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

97

%*[SC08600( ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)

*[SC08800( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you canautomatically maintain a constant speed at orabove 30 mph (50 km/h).

*[SC08900( ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

[SC09150( BCGV)12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at highelevations, or when pulling a trailer, itmay be desirable to drive with thetransmission in the Overdrive offmode. This can be done by depressingthe Transmission Control Switch onthe transmission gear selection lever.Driving in this mode prevents thetransmission from shifting excessivelywhen ascending grades, and helpsmaintain speed when going downsteep hills.

*[SC09200( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when usingthe speed control. This will cause theengine to overspeed.

[SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavyload, significant speed drops may occur. If thespeed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) theautomatic speed control will, by design, besuspended. Some vehicles may requiretemporary resumption of manual speed controlwhile ascending steep grades in order tomaintain the selected speed.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

98

[SC09300(MBC )08/93]

half page art:0001014-B

The speed control switches on the steering wheel

*[SC10100( ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:

*[SC10300( ALL)03/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.

*[SC10400( ALL)04/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above30 mph (50 km/h) using the acceleratorpedal.

*[SC10800( ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately to set your speed. If you keepthis switch pressed, your speed will continueto increase.

*[SC10900( ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.

*[SC11000( ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, yourvehicle may momentarily slow down or speedup, even though the speed control is on. This isnormal.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

99

*[SC11030( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your setspeed while driving in D (Drive) on adownhill grade, you may want todepress the Transmission ControlSwitch located on the shift lever toturn off overdrive to reduce vehiclespeed. Speed control cannot reduce thevehicle speed if it goes above your setspeed on a downhill grade.

*[SC11100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not use the speed control in heavytraffic or on roads that are winding,slippery, or unpaved.

%*[SC11200( ALL)03/95] Accelerating With the Speed ControlOperating

*[SC11300( ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed upmomentarily. When you take your foot off theaccelerator, the vehicle will return to the setspeed.

%*[SC11400( ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control

*[SC11450( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, useone of the following procedures:

[SC11500( ALL)05/94] ❑COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicle slowsdown to the desired speed.

[SC11550( ALL)05/94] ❑Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicleattains the desired speed, press the SETACCEL switch and release it immediately.

*[SC11650( ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, thenyou must manually accelerate to a speed over30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

100

*[SC11700( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed,follow one of these procedures:

[SC11750( ALL)05/94] ❑ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCELswitch. Release the switch when the vehiclehas accelerated to the desired speed.

[SC11800( ALL)05/94] ❑Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, press theSET ACCEL switch and release itimmediately.

%*[SC12800( ALL)03/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed

[SC13000( BCGV)03/95] If you press the brake pedal, speed control issuspended. You can return to the set speed bypressing the RESUME switch, as long as you didnot press the OFF switch. You must be drivingat least 30 mph (48 km/h).

*[SC13400( ALL)03/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to thepreviously set speed and then maintain it.

%*[SC13501( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off

*[SC13601( ALL)04/95] Press the OFF switch.

*[SC13701( ALL)01/95] Speed control is also turned OFF each time thevehicle ignition is shut off.

File:rcscb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:25 1996

101

Features

*[FV00300( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.

%*[FV00400( ALL)01/95] Doors%*[FV01200(MBC )03/95] Anti-theft front door lock knobs

*[FV01300(MBC )01/95] Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to preventunlocking the door by pulling up on the lockknob. To unlock and open the front door frominside the vehicle, pull on the inside doorhandle.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

102

%*[FV01400( ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, thecontrols to lock the doors are on the trim panelof the front door. When you close the doorsafter you set the door locks, the doors remainlocked. If the power mechanism fails, the manualdoor locks will override the power controls.Pulling on a front inside door handle willautomatically override and release the front doorlock.

[FV02000( BC )05/95]

half page art:0010223-D

The power locks on the driver’s door

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

103

%*[FV02600( BC)01/95] Using the Illuminated Entry System(If equipped)

[FV03150( BC)05/95] The interior lights turn on when you lift theoutside door handle on either front door whenyou press UNLOCK, TRUNK, or PANIC on aprogrammed remote entry transmitter if yourvehicle is equipped with remote entry.

[FV03200( BCGV)02/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25seconds or when you turn the ignition key toON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off ifyou have turned them on manually or if a dooris open.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

104

[FV03210( MBC )05/95] Anti-Theft Alarm System(If equipped)

[FV03220(MBC )05/95] When armed, this system helps protect yourvehicle against break-ins or theft.

%*[FV03230(MBC )05/95] When an unauthorized entry occurs, the systemtriggers and will:

*[FV03240(MBC )05/95] ❑ flash the headlamps, parking lamps, andalarm indicator lamp

*[FV03250(MBC )02/95] ❑honk the horn

*[FV03260(MBC )05/95] ❑disable the starting circuit to prevent thevehicle from being started

*[FV03270(MBC )02/95] NOTE: The factory installed Remote EntrySystem has a PANIC feature that alsochirps the vehicle horn and flashes theinterior/exterior lamps when thePANIC button on the remote entrytransmitter is pushed. The PANICalarm and the Anti-Theft alarm are twoseparate features. Both the anti-theftalarm and the PANIC feature can beactive at the same time.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

105

[FV03280(MBC )05/95] To tell the difference between a PANIC alarmand a triggered Anti-theft alarm:

[FV03290(MBC )05/95] ❑only the Anti-Theft alarm will cause thealarm indicator lamp (located in the center ofthe instrument panel) to flash on and off.

[FV03301(MBC )05/95] ❑only the Anti-Theft alarm will disable thestart circuit so that the vehicle can not bestarted.

[FV03310(MBC )05/95] ❑ the Anti-Theft alarm will not stop by pushingthe PANIC button on the Remote Entrytransmitter.

*[FV03320(MBC )05/95] For more information on the PANIC alarm, seeRemote Entry System in the Index.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

106

%*[FV03330(MBC )05/95] Arming the system

[FV03340(MBC )05/95] To arm the system, do the following steps insequence:

*[FV03350(MBC )05/95] 1. Remove the key from the ignition.

[FV03355(MBC )05/95] At this point, the anti-theft system automaticallymonitors the ignition keylock cylinder. If thelock cylinder is forcibly removed, the anti-theftalarm system will trigger. To arm the remainingportion of the system, follow steps 2-4.

*[FV03360(MBC )05/95] 2. Open any door. The alarm indicator lightwill start flashing to remind you to arm thesystem.

[FV03370(MBC )05/95] 3. Lock the doors by using the power doorlock switch or by pressing the remote entrytransmitter LOCK button.

[FV03380(MBC )05/95] The alarm indicator will now glow steadily.

[FV03390(MBC )05/95] 4. Close all doors. The alarm indicator lightwill then remain on steadily forapproximately 30 seconds and then go out.When the light goes out, the system isarmed.

[FV03400(MBC )05/95] NOTE: Be sure to close all doors completely. Ifnot, the alarm indicator light willremain on. Remember, your anti-theftsystem is armed only after the alarmindicator light remains on steadily forapproximately 30 seconds after the lastdoor is closed, and then goes out.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

107

[FV03410(MBC )05/95] You can also arm the anti-theft system byfollowing this sequence:

*[FV03420(MBC )05/95] 1. Remove key from ignition.

*[FV03430(MBC )05/95] 2. Close all of the doors.

[FV03445( BC )05/95] 3. Press the remote entry transmitter LOCKbutton to lock the doors. The alarm indicatorwill come on for 30 seconds to show that thealarm is arming and then turn off to showthat the alarm has been armed.

*[FV03450(MBC )05/95] The anti-theft system is designed to work withthe factory installed remote entry system. It maynot work with other remote entry systems.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

108

%*[FV03460(MBC )05/95] Disarming an untriggered anti-theft system

*[FV03470(MBC )05/95] You can disarm the system by:

[FV03480(MBC )05/95] ❑unlocking a door with the key (turn the keyall the way to the end of travel or the systemmay not disarm.

*[FV03490(MBC )05/95] ❑using the UNLOCK button of the remoteentry transmitter

[FV03495( BC )05/95] ❑using the keyless entry unlock code on thekeypad

[FV03500(MBC )05/95] ❑ if remaining in the vehicle, turn the ignitionswitch to ON or ACC

*[FV03510(MBC )05/95] Triggering the alarm system

*[FV03520(MBC )05/95] The armed system will be triggered if:

[FV03530(MBC )05/95] ❑any door is opened without disarming thesystem first (see previous paragraphs)

*[FV03540(MBC )05/95] ❑ the trunk lock cylinder is removed, or

*[FV03543(MBC )05/95] NOTE: You can open the trunk with your keywithout setting off the alarm.

[FV03547( BC )05/95] ❑ the ignition key lock cylinder is forciblyremoved from the steering column.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

109

%*[FV03550(MBC )05/95] Disarming a triggered system

*[FV03560(MBC )05/95] The alarm can be disarmed by:

*[FV03570(MBC )05/95] ❑unlocking a front door with the key

*[FV03580(MBC )05/95] ❑using the UNLOCK button of the remoteentry transmitter

*[FV03582(MBC )05/95] NOTE: The flashing lights and honking hornwill shut off automatically within 2minutes 45 seconds after the system istriggered. It will trigger again ifanother intrusion occurs. However, thestarter circuit remains disabled untilthe system is disarmed.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

110

%*[FV08030( ALL)02/95] Remote Entry System(If equipped)

*[FV08036( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, youcan lock and unlock the vehicle doors and openthe trunk without using a key. The remote alsohas a personal alarm feature. The buttons for thesystem are located on the hand heldtransmitter(s) that came with your vehicle.

*[FV08040( ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to fourtransmitters. Your vehicle came with twotransmitters. Additional transmitters can beordered from your dealer.

*[FV08045(MBC )02/95] The remote entry features only operate with theignition in the OFF position.

[FV08050(MBC )02/95]

one third page art:0001000-A

Remote entry transmitter

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

111

%*[FV08055( ALL)02/95] Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk

*[FV08060( ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCKbutton.

*[FV08065( ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCKbutton a second time within five seconds ofunlocking the driver’s door.

[FV08070(MBC )05/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button.

*[FV08080( ALL)02/95] Locking the doors

*[FV08085( ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.

*[FV08090(MBC )01/95] If you would like a signal that the doors arebeing locked, press the LOCK button againwithin five seconds. The doors will lock again,the horn will beep and the low beam headlampsand tail lamps will flash.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

112

*[FV08114( ALL)02/95] Activating the remote personal alarm

*[FV08120( ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote personalalarm, press the PANIC button. This will honkthe horn and flash the low beam headlamps andtail lamps for approximately two minutes andforty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF bypressing the PANIC button again or by turningthe ignition key to the RUN position.

[FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK,TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entrysystem turns on the interior lights for 25seconds. You can turn these lights off with theLOCK button or by turning the ignition to theRUN position. The interior lights will not turnoff if you have turned them on manually or if adoor is open.

%*[FV08725( ALL)02/95] Replacing the batteries

*[FV08750(MBC )02/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by twocoin type three-volt lithium 2016batteries (included) that should last for severalyears of normal use. If you notice a significantdecrease in operating range, the batteries shouldbe replaced. Replacement batteries can bepurchased at most pharmacies, watch stores orat your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

113

*[FV08775( ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remoteentry system can also be affected byweather conditions (such as very coldtemperatures) or structures around thevehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radioand TV towers, etc.). Typical operatingrange will allow you to be up to 33feet (10 meters) away from yourvehicle.

*[FV08800(MBC )02/95]

quarter page art:0020790-A

Replacing the batteries

*[FV08825(MBC )02/95] The transmitter can be snapped apart to replacethe batteries by twisting a thin coin between thetwo halves of the transmitter. DO NOT TAKETHE FRONT PART OF THE TRANSMITTERAPART. When installing the new batteries, besure to place the positive (+) side down asmarked. Snap the two halves back together.

%*[FV08850( ALL)02/95] Replacement/additional transmitters

*[FV08875(MBC )02/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, return theremaining transmitters to your dealer forreprogramming of your remote entry system.This is necessary to prevent further unauthorizeduse of the lost transmitter.

*[FV08900(MBC )02/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased fromyour dealer (remote entry system will work withup to four transmitters). Return your existingtransmitters to your dealer so the remote entrysystem can be reprogrammed with your newand existing transmitters.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

114

*[FV08925( ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OFTHE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECTTO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSEHARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THISDEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANYINTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDINGINTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSEUNDESIRED OPERATION.

%*[FV08950( ALL)02/95] Windows%*[FV08980( BCGV)02/95] Using the Power Windows

[FV08990(MBC )03/03] Each door has a power control that opens andcloses the window on that door. The driver’sdoor has a master control panel that operates thewindows.

*[FV09050( ALL)01/95] Power windows can only be opened or closedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCposition.

*[FV09075(MBCG )05/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the powerwindows. They may seriously hurtthemselves. Make sure occupants are clearof the window(s) before closing.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

115

[FV09200( BC )05/95]

half page art:0010233-G

The master controls on the driver’s door

%*[FV13100( BC )02/95] Moon Roof (If equipped)[FV13200( BC )05/95] You can move the moon roof back to open the

glass panel, or you can tilt it up to ventilate thevehicle. There is also an intermediate positionbetween closed and open which can reduce windnoise at speeds between 30 and 45 miles perhour (50 and 70 km/h).

*[FV13300( BC )01/95] The rocker type switch is used to open and closethe moon roof. You must press and hold theswitch until the desired position is reached. Atfully open, closed and intermediate positions, themotor will automatically turn off. Release theswitch at this time to avoid motor damage.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

116

[FV13400( BC )05/92]

two third page art:0010248-C

The switch for the moon roof

[FV13600( BC )07/93] To open the moon roof, press and hold the rearportion of the switch. The glass panel will moveto the intermediate position and stop. If the rearof the switch is pressed again the glass panelwill move to the full open position and stop.

[FV13700( BC )07/93] To close the moon roof, press and hold the frontportion of the switch. The glass panel will moveto the intermediate position and stop. Press andhold the front of the switch again and the panelwill move to the fully closed position and stop.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

117

*[FV13800( BC )01/95] To tilt the moon roof into vent position whenthe glass panel is closed, press the front portionof the switch.

*[FV13900( BC )04/95] To close from vent position, press and hold therear portion of the switch.

*[FV14100( BC )01/95] Occasionally wiping the outside guide rail coversof the moon roof with a clean cloth will helpkeep the moon roof working properly.

[FV14200( BC )05/89]

one third page art:0010250-B

The moon roof

*[FV14300( BC )01/95] RWARNING

Do not let children play with the moonroof. They may seriously hurt themselves.

*[FV14400( BC )01/95] Sliding Shade

*[FV14500( BC )01/95] The moon roof has a sliding shade that you canmanually open or close to block the sun whenthe glass panel is shut.

*[FV14600( BC )01/95] To close the sliding shade, pull the shade towardthe front of the vehicle. The shade automaticallyopens and locks when the moon roof is opened.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

118

%*[FV15700( ALL)01/95] Seats%*[FV15710( ALL)04/95] Head Restraints

*[FV15720( ALL)04/95] If you use them properly, head restraints willhelp protect your head and neck in a collision.

*[FV15730( ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if youposition it behind your head and not behindyour neck.

*[FV15740( ALL)02/95] Standard head restraints

*[FV15750( ALL)01/95] You can adjust the head restraints for yourcomfort and protection.

[FV15770( ALL)05/92]

one third page art:0010048-C

Adjusting the head restraint

% [FV15800(MBC )06/93] Adjusting Manual Seats

*[FV16000( ALL)02/89] In the front seats, you can move the whole seatforward or backward or tilt the back of the seatforward or backward.

[FV16100(MBC )05/92] To move the seats forward or backward:

[FV16200( BCGV)04/95] 1. Find the adjustment bar underneath the frontpart of the seat.

[FV16400( BCGV)04/95] 2. Lift the bar to unlatch the seat.

*[FV16600( ALL)04/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

119

[FV16700( BCGV)04/95] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its newposition. Make sure the seat locks securely inplace.

[FV16900( BC )07/89]

quarter page art:0010252-A

The front seat adjustment bar

*[FV17100(MBC )02/95] To recline the front manual seats:

*[FV17200( ALL)01/95] 1. On the side of the seat, find the handle forthe recliner.

*[FV17300( ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.

*[FV17400( ALL)01/95] 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjustit to the position you want. You can tilt theseat back or bring it forward.

*[FV17500( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its newposition.

*[FV17600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.

*[FV17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury in acollision, always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap belt snugand low across the hips.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

120

%*[FV17900(MBC )01/95] Seatback Recline

[FV18100( BC )03/90]

one third page art:0010256-A

Front seatback release levers

*[FV18300( BC )01/95] It is not necessary to use the emergency seatbackrelease lever for rear seat entry or exit. Theseatback remains unlocked with normal usageand locks only during emergency stopping, uponimpact, or on steep downhill grades. The inertiaseatback latch will allow the seatback to rotateapproximately 5˚ forward before it locks. Therelease is provided only to unlock the seatbackwhen parked on steep downhill grades or after acollision.

*[FV18400( BC )05/95] RWARNING

A seatback which is folded forward evena small degree may not lock properly inthe event of a sudden stop or collision.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

121

%*[FV18500( BCGV)05/95] Using the Power Seats (If equipped)

[FV18600( BC )08/93] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjustthem in several directions. The controls are onthe side of the seats.

[FV18800( BC )05/95]

half page art:0010258-F

The power controls on the driver’s seat

*[FV18850( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not pile cargo higher than theseatbacks to avoid injuring people in acollision or sudden stop.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

122

% [FV19700( BC )03/95] Sport Seat

[FV19920( BC )03/95]

two third page art:0010489-D

Sport seat controls

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

123

%*[FV19950(MBC )03/95] Rear Seat Entry

[FV20000( BC )06/93]

one third page art:0010264-A

Entering the rear seat

[FV20100(MBC )03/95] The rotating boot on the lap belt is designed toallow rear seat entry/exit. To enter the rear seat:

*[FV20200( BC )01/95] 1. Rotate the safety belt boot rearward.

*[FV20300( BC )01/95] 2. Enter the rear seat in front of the safety belt.

*[FV20400( BC )01/95] 3. Rotate the safety belt boot forward to allowuse by the front seat passengers.

%*[FV20500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats

*[FV20600( ALL)05/95] Leather and vinyl

*[FV20650( ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaneror a mild soap.

%*[FV20700( ALL)04/95] Fabric

*[FV20750( ALL)04/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.

*[FV20775( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

124

%*[FV20800( ALL)01/95] Mirrors

*[FV20850(ALL )03/95] You can adjust your rearview mirror in anydirection. The special swivel bracket lets youmove the mirror up or down and from side toside.

[FV021000(ALL )03/95] RWARNING

Make sure you can see clearly through therearview mirror at all times. Do not blockyour vision. If you cannot see through themirror, it could result in a collision,injuring yourself and others.

% [FV24100( BCGV)07/93] Adjusting the Dual Electric RemoteControl Mirrors

[FV24300( B )06/93] If equipped, the switch for controlling the dualelectric remote control mirrors is located on thedriver’s door.

%*[FV24400( ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirrorwith harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

125

[FV24500( BC )03/93]

half page art:0010269-D

The mirror controls on the driver’s door

*[FV24700( ALL)04/95] To adjust the side mirrors:

*[FV24800( ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s doorpanel.

*[FV24900( ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving theselector switch to R or L.

[FV25000( ALL)06/93] 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrowsfor the direction you want to move themirror.

*[FV25100( ALL)01/95] 4. Return the selector switch to the middleposition to keep the mirror in place.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

126

[FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror

[FV28800( ALL)03/90] The side view mirror on the right is a convexmirror. This mirror gives you a wider view ofthe lanes on your right and behind you.

*[FV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The side view mirror on the right makesobjects appear smaller and farther awaythan they actually are.

%*[FV28950( ALL)01/95] Sun Visors%*[FV29100( ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun

Visors (If equipped)

[FV29300( ALL)06/93] To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirrorcover.

[FV29800( BC )05/92]

one third page art:0010277-B

The mirror on the sun visor

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

127

%*[FV30200(MBC )01/95] Console[FV30350(MBC )06/93] Your vehicle has a full console. The full console

has the features shown in the illustration below.

[FV30500( BC )03/95]

half page art:0010282-E

The features on the full console

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

128

%*[FV32875( ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments[FV32905( BC )07/93] In addition to the console, your vehicle may

have several small storage compartments:

[FV33000( BCGV)11/94] ❑a glove compartment that locks. Use theround key to lock and unlock it.

*[FV33100( BCGV)01/95] ❑ two map pockets on the panels of the frontdoors.

*[FV33300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not put objects on the ledge betweenthe back seat and the rear window, asthey can become dangerous projectiles andinjure someone.

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

129

%*[FV33400( ALL)01/95] Trunk

*[FV33500( ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually

[FV34000( BC )05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty ofroom for storage — 15.1 cubic feet (.42 cubicmeters).

%*[FV34600( ALL)03/95] To open and close the trunk from the outside:

[FV34950( BCGV)03/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock on the trunk.

[FV35100( ALL)11/90] 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunkopens.

[FV35300( ALL)11/90] 3. Remove the key before you close and lockthe lid.

[FV35450( ALL)06/93] 4. Shut the trunk lid completely.

% [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for theTrunk (If equipped)

[FV36500( BC )07/93] With the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition, you can use the remote control underyour console armrest to unlock and open thetrunk.

[FV36700( BC )05/95]

quarter page art:0010359-C

The trunk release button located under the armrest

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

130

% [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat[FV47600(MBC )08/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side

floor mat you must attach/detach the positivelocation grommet from the hook on the floor.The hook is just forward of the left hand trackof the driver’s seat.

[FV47800(MBC )08/93]

half page art:0010758-A

The positive location floor mat hook

File:rcfvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:50:02 1996

131

Electron

icS

oun

dS

ystems

%[AS01100(MBC)05/94]

fullpageart:0060658-A

Com

pact

Disc

Rad

io

File:rcasb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

132

%*[AS01105(MBC )04/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS01175(MBC )05/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the ElectronicStereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player.

[AS01200(MBC )12/94] Using the Controls on Your New CompactDisc Radio

*[AS01300(MBC )04/95] Most of the features of this unit work for bothradio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobsand buttons control several different functions,so be sure to read all of the operatinginstructions carefully.

*[AS01400(MBC )04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS01500(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS01600(MBC )04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS01700(MBC )04/95] Press the (+/s) side of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS01800(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off (with the“POWER” button), the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power is switched back on.

*[AS01900(MBC )04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS02000(MBC )04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

133

%*[AS02100(MBC )05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS02200(MBC )04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS02300(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manuallytune

*[AS02400(MBC )04/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either thetop a or bottom b half of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the top or bottom halfof the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show ablinking “M”.

*[AS02500(MBC )04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS02600(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS02700(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the top ahalf of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band.Press the bottom b half of the button toselect the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding thebutton, listenable stations can be passed overto reach the desired station.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

134

*[AS02800(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scanradio stations

*[AS02900(MBC )04/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the top a half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately fiveseconds. Pushing the bottom b half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan modedown the frequency band, again stopping oneach listenable station for approximately fiveseconds.

*[AS03000(MBC )04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.

*[AS03200(MBC )04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS03300(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

[AS03350(MBC )05/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS03400(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS03600(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS03700(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

135

*[AS03950(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS04050(MBC )03/95] If no stations are in memory preset, you canactivate the Auto Memory Load feature bypressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”button for approximately three seconds.Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttonsin AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seekingout the first six strong stations for therespective band and storing them in memorybuttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set ofstrong stations from the FM band.)

*[AS04150(MBC )04/95] With Auto Memory Store, you cancontinually set strong stations into yourmemory buttons without losing your existingmemory presets, which is especially handywhile traveling. Your radio will automaticallyset your memory buttons to the strong localstations so you don’t have to continuallymanually tune to existing stations.

*[AS04250(MBC )02/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radiowill set the first five strong stations of theband you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into thememory buttons. The display will show“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,stopping momentarily on the stations beingset into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and this displaywill show “AUTO” each time a preset isactivated.

*[AS04350(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

136

*[AS04450(MBC )04/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.

*[AS04550(MBC )04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store modeand return to the manually-set memorybutton stations (or those stations set usingAuto Memory Load), simply push the“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time AutoMemory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of five strongstations.

*[AS04600(MBC )02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS04700(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

[AS04750(MBC )05/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS”. Push the top (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasebass (more “lows”), and push the bottom (–)side to decrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS04800(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

[AS04900(MBC )05/94] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB”. Push the top (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasetreble (more “highs”), and push the bottom(–) side to decrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS04950(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

[AS05000(MBC )05/94] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL”.Push the top (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and push the bottom (–) side toshift the sound to the left speakers.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

137

*[AS05100(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

[AS05200(MBC )05/94] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE”.Push the top (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and push the bottom (–) side toshift the sound to the rear speakers.

*[AS05300(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble, andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions (left to right, front to rear).

*[AS06800(MBC )04/95] Using the Controls on Your New CompactDisc Player

*[AS07000(MBC )04/95] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capableof playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without anadapter! The Player operates when the power ison and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handlethe disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read andfollow all of the care and cleaning instructionsunder How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs.

*[AS07100(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc isejected and “ERROR” begins scrollingin the display, remove the disc andreinsert it right side up (label side up).

[AS07200(MBC )03/95] The digital display on your CD player willeither show the track (selection) number or theelapsed time. (The display mode can be selectedby pressing the memory preset button #6.)Indicators for play b, stop X and compressionon (“C”) are also in the display. (These featuresare described later.)

*[AS07300(MBC )04/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CDplayer will override that of the radio.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

138

*[AS07400(MBC )04/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance andfader controls on the radio are alsoused with the CD player. Refer toearlier operating instructions on thesecontrols.

*[AS07500(MBC )04/95] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS07550(MBC )04/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the discopening. When inserted, the disc automaticallyloads into the unit and play starts at thebeginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS07600(MBC )04/95] When the disc reaches the end, the disc playerautomatically returns to the beginning of thedisc and resumes playing.

*[AS07610(MBC )02/95] How to change the track being played

[AS07620(MBC )03/95] Press the top a side of the “SEEK” button toseek forward to the next track of the disc. If thebutton is held and the last track is reached, thedisc player will automatically begin playing thelast track of the disc.

[AS07630(MBC )03/95] Press the bottom b side of the “SEEK” buttonto seek the previous track on the disc.

*[AS07650(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the discopening is secured to prevent theaccidental insertion of a second disc.

*[AS07700(MBC )04/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protectioncircuitry to protect the laser diode. Ifthe temperature of the player reaches167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuitwill shut off the player and “TOOHOT” will scroll in the display forapproximately five seconds (radio willresume playing). When the temperaturereturns to normal operating range, theCD player will again be operational.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

139

*[AS07750(MBC )04/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

*[AS07800(MBC )04/95] When a disc is loaded, the unit automaticallyenters the play mode and the play indicator ailluminates. To stop temporarily, press the“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button.The stop indicator X in the display illuminatesand operation returns to the radio mode. Toresume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP”button once again.

*[AS07850(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFFduring play and then is set to the ONor ACCESSORY position, the CDplayer will resume playing in the modeit was in when ignition was turned off.

*[AS07900(MBC )05/95] How to fast forward or reverse your CDplayer

*[AS07950(MBC )05/95] To quickly search for a particular point in aselection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward)or the “REV” button (to reverse). While eitherbutton is pressed, the disc goes forward orbackward at two different speeds depending onhow long the button is held down. (Pressingeither button for more than approximately threeseconds will speed up the process.) Release thebutton at the desired point (found by watchingthe elapsed playing time in the display or bylistening to the sound during fast forward orreverse). When you have reached the beginningof track 1, the CD player will begin playing.

*[AS08000(MBC )04/95] When you have reached the end of the disc bykeeping the fast forward button pressed, thedisplay will show “END” and the player will gointo pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP”button to begin playing the first track of thedisc, press the “REV” button to back up fromthe end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” functionto locate a desired track.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

140

*[AS08020(MBC )04/95] Using the “SCAN” function

[AS08030(MBC )03/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the topa or bottom b half of the “SEEK” button toscan forward or reverse, respectively. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping oneach listenable track for approximately eightseconds. This continues until you press the“SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While inthe scan mode, the display shows the currentsampled track number.

*[AS08040(MBC )04/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS08050(MBC )04/95] ❑Compression

*[AS08060(MBC )04/95] The compression feature will bring soft andloud passages closer together for a moreconsistent listening level.

*[AS08070(MBC )04/95] To turn the compression on, press the“COMP” button. When on, the compressionindicator (“C”) will appear in the display.Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS08080(MBC )04/95] ❑Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS08090(MBC )04/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player butis not removed from the disc opening withinapproximately 10 seconds, the player willautomatically reload the disc for storage,unless the disc is automatically ejected due toa “focus error” (disc inserted upside down).In this case, the disc will not be automaticallyreloaded.

*[AS08095(MBC )04/95] How to eject the disc

*[AS08096(MBC )04/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject thedisc and resume radio operation of your audiosystem.

*[AS08097(MBC )04/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radiopower and/or ignition is on or off.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

141

%[AS21350(MBC)02/95]

fullpageart:0060641-B

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

with

Cassette

File:rcasb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

142

%*[AS21370(MBC )05/95] Electronic Stereo Cassette Radio

*[AS21400(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS21500(MBC )02/95] How to turn the radio on and adjust thevolume

*[AS22050(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

[AS22060(MBC )04/94] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to increase the volume. Press the left (–)side of the button to decrease the volume.Illuminated bars in the display show the relativevolume level.

*[AS22070(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off (with the“POWER” button), the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power is switched back on.

*[AS22100(MBC )04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS22250(MBC )02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band or to stop/store cassette tape(when in cassette mode). Pushing the buttonmore than once will alternate between AM, FM1and FM2. These functions are used with thestation memory buttons described under How totune radio stations.

[AS22300(MBC )05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS22425(MBC )07/92] There are four ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using the Automatic Music Search(“AMS”) button, “SEEK” the station, “SCAN” tothe station or select the station by using thememory buttons, which you can set to anydesired frequency.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

143

[AS22450(MBC )05/95] ❑Using the “AMS” function to manually tuneyour radio

[AS22650(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by first pressing the“AMS” button, (display shows “TUNE”) thenpressing and releasing either the right a orleft b side of the “SEEK” button. To changefrequencies quickly, press and hold downeither the right or left side of the “SEEK”button.

*[AS22700(MBC )02/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS22800(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS22900(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band.Press the left (b) side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.

[AS23150(MBC )05/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS23175(MBC )07/94] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scanmode. The radio will begin scanning up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenablestation for approximately a five-secondsampling. This continues until you press the“SCAN” button a second time. The displayflashes “AM” or “FM.”

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

144

*[AS23200(MBC )04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS23300(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS23400(MBC )02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS23500(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS23700(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS23800(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

[AS23900(MBC )02/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the station memory preset buttons willneed to be reset.

*[AS24000(MBC )02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS24100(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS24250(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasebass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)side to decrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS24300(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS24450(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasetreble (more “highs”), and push the left (s)side to decrease treble (less “highs”).

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

145

*[AS24500(MBC )08/89] Speaker features and operation

*[AS24600(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS24750(MBC )02/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and push the left (s) side to shiftthe sound to the left speakers.

*[AS24800(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS24950(MBC )02/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and push the left (s) side to shiftthe sound to the rear speakers.

*[AS24960(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble, andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions (left to right, front to rear).

*[AS25000(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS25500(MBC )02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS25600(MBC )02/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to theright) firmly into the tape door opening, makingsure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

146

*[AS25700(MBC )02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS25800(MBC )02/95] NOTE: The tape track number indicated in thedisplay does not necessarily correspondto the tape track or side number on thecassette label. It is used only toindicate when the tape mechanismreverses tracks.

[AS25810( BC )03/95] NOTE: Depending on your vehicle, the displayof your radio may show arrows (gor h) or numerals (“1” or “2”) toindicate the direction of tape travel. Ineither case, at the end of the tape, thedirection automatically reverses andplays the other side of the tape.

[AS25825( BC )05/94] ❑Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)(If your display shows numerals)

*[AS25850(MBC )03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”will appear in the display). Then, push theleft (h) button to rewind to the beginningof the current selection or press the right(g) button to fast forward to the beginningof the next selection.

[AS25900( BC )05/94] ❑Fast forwarding the tape (if your displayshows numerals)

*[AS26000(MBC )03/95] Push the right (g) button to fast forwardthe tape.

[AS26100( BC )05/94] ❑Rewinding the tape (if your diplay showsnumerals)

*[AS26200(MBC )03/95] Push the left (h) button to rewind thetape.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

147

[AS26300( BC )07/92] ❑Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)(if your display shows arrows)

[AS26400( BC )03/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button. Then,push the appropriate fast-wind button,depending upon the direction of the tapetravel arrow in the display. For example, ifthe tape travel arrow is pointing to the left,push the left (h) button to rewind to thebeginning of the current selection. If the tapetravel arrow is pointing to the right, pressthe right (g) button to fast forward to thebeginning of the next selection.

[AS26500( BC )07/90] ❑Fast forwarding the tape (if your displayshows arrows)

*[AS26600( BC )03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the fast-windbutton with the arrows pointing in the samedirection as indicated in the display. Forexample, if the tape travel arrow in thedisplay is pointing to the left, press the left(h) button to fast forward the tape. Toreturn to the play mode, press the oppositefast-wind button momentarily, until fastforward stops.

*[AS26700( BC )07/90] ❑Rewinding the tape (if your display showsarrows)

*[AS26800( BC )03/95] To rewind the tape, press the fast-windbutton with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction as indicated in the display.For example, if the tape travel arrow in thedisplay is pointing to the left, press the right(g) button to rewind the tape. To return tothe play mode, press the opposite fast-windbutton momentarily, until rewind stops.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

148

*[AS26900(MBC )02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS27000(MBC )03/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tapecan be selected at any time by pushing bothfast-wind buttons (h and g) at thesame time.

*[AS27100(MBC )02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS27250(MBC )02/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJECT” button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS27300(MBC )02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS27400(MBC )02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS27500(MBC )05/95] Push the k button to activate. Push again todeactivate.

*[AS27600(MBC )02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS27700(MBC )02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS27750(MBC )02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS27800(MBC )02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

149

*[AS27900(MBC )02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS28001(MBC )02/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS28101(MBC )02/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting a cassette.

*[AS28200(MBC )03/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer when not in use. High heat in thevehicle can cause the cassette to warp.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

150

%[AS43455(BC)02/95]

fullpageart:0060575-C

High

-Level

Au

dio

System

File:rcasb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

151

*[AS43458( BC )03/95] High-Level Audio System

*[AS43460(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS43470(MBC )04/95] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS43480(MBC )04/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS43500(MBC )04/95] How to adjust the volume

*[AS43510(MBC )04/95] Press the +/– side of the “VOLUME” button toincrease/decrease volume. Bars illuminate in thedisplay to show the relative volume level.

*[AS43520(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off (with the“POWER” button), the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power is switched back on.

*[AS43530(MBC )04/95] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS43540(MBC )02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band or to stop/store cassette tape(when in cassette mode). Pushing the buttonmore than once will alternate between AM, FM1and FM2. These functions are used with thestation memory buttons described under How totune radio stations.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

152

%*[AS43550(MBC )05/95] How to tune radio stations

*[AS43560(MBC )04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS43570(MBC )05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function

*[AS43580(MBC )03/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200 kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10 kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either theright (a) or left (b) side of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the right or left side ofthe “SEEK” button.

*[AS43590(MBC )04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)

*[AS43600(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS43610(MBC )04/95] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band.Press the left (b) side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

153

*[AS43630(MBC )01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS43640(MBC )03/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately afive-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scanmode down the frequency band, againstopping on each listenable station forapproximately a five-second sampling.

*[AS43650(MBC )04/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.

*[AS43670(MBC )04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

*[AS43680(MBC )02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).

*[AS43690(MBC )02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:

*[AS43700(MBC )04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS43720(MBC )04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS43730(MBC )04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

154

*[AS43750(MBC )04/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS43760(MBC )03/95] If no stations are in memory preset, you canactivate the Auto Memory Load feature bypressing and holding the “AUTO PRESET”button for approximately three seconds.Auto Memory Load sets all memory buttonsin AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially by seekingout the first six strong stations for therespective band and storing them in memorybuttons 1-5. (FM2 will store the second set ofstrong stations from the FM band.)

*[AS43770(MBC )04/95] With Auto Memory Store, you cancontinually set strong stations into yourmemory buttons without losing your existingmemory presets, which is especially handywhile traveling. Your radio will automaticallyset your memory buttons to the strong localstations so you don’t have to continuallymanually tune to existing stations.

*[AS43780(MBC )02/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radiowill set the first five strong stations of theband you are in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into thememory buttons. The display will show“AUTO”, then run through the frequencies,stopping momentarily on the stations beingset into the memory buttons. The radio isnow in the “AUTO” mode and this displaywill show “AUTO” each time a preset isactivated.

*[AS43790(MBC )04/95] NOTE: If there are less than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

155

*[AS43800(MBC )04/95] After all stations have been filled, the radiowill begin playing the station stored onmemory button 1.

*[AS43810(MBC )04/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store modeand return to the manually-set memorybutton stations (or those stations set usingAuto Memory Load), simply push the“AUTO PRESET” button. Display will show“AUTO” then “OFF”. The next time AutoMemory Store is activated on that band, theradio will store the next set of five strongstations.

*[AS43830(MBC )02/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS43850(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS43860(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the right (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasebass (more “lows”), and push the left (s)side to decrease bass (less “lows”).

*[AS43870(MBC )04/95] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS43880(MBC )02/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the right (+)side of the “VOLUME” button to increasetreble (more “highs”), and push the left (s)side to decrease treble (less “highs”).

*[AS43890(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS43900(MBC )02/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the rightspeakers, and push the left (s) side to shiftthe sound to the left speakers.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

156

*[AS44010(MBC )04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS44020(MBC )02/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the right (+) side of the “VOLUME”button to shift the sound to the frontspeakers, and push the left (s) side to shiftthe sound to the rear speakers.

*[AS44030(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble, andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions (left to right, front to rear).

*[AS44040(MBC )02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer

*[AS44050(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use thecassette tape player or eject a tape.

[AS44060(MBC )04/95] NOTE: Adjust the volume, treble, bass, balanceand fader controls in the same manneras for radio stations.

*[AS44070(MBC )02/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS44080(MBC )02/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped withpower loading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process. Displayindicates “M” (for metal/CrO

2) while tape is

playing.

*[AS44090(MBC )02/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded andstored with the ignition and radiopower off.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

157

*[AS44100(MBC )02/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS44110(MBC )02/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS44120(MBC )02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

[AS44140(MBC )02/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will automatically beginplaying until fast forward is manuallystopped (by pushing the “PLAY PROG”button) or the end of the tape is reached.

*[AS44160(MBC )01/95] At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the otherside of the tape.

[AS44170(MBC )02/95] ❑Fast rewinding the tape

[AS44180(MBC )02/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.The radio will automatically begin playingwhen rewind is manually stopped (bypushing the “PLAY PROG” button) or thebeginning of the tape is reached.

*[AS44190(MBC )01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

[AS44200(MBC )03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape. Push the left(b) side to seek the beginning of the currenttape selection.

*[AS44210(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If you want to restart a currentlyplaying tape selection, press the left(b) side of the “SEEK” button afterapproximately three seconds into thecurrent selection.

*[AS44220(MBC )03/95] Whirling sprockets in the display (l)indicate the direction of tape travel.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

158

*[AS44230(MBC )01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS44240(MBC )03/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode (display indicates “SCN”).Pushing the right (a) side of the “SEEK”button will begin the forward scan mode onthe tape currently playing, stopping on eachtape selection for approximately aneight-second sampling.

*[AS44250(MBC )03/95] Pushing the left (b) side of the “SEEK”button will begin the reverse scan mode,stopping on each previous tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling.While scanning, the display indicates whirlingsprockets plus an “S” (m).

*[AS44260(MBC )02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection press the“SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS44270(MBC )02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

[AS44280(MBC )02/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selectedat any time by pressing the “PLAY/PROG”button.

*[AS44300(MBC )02/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS44310(MBC )04/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing ifthe radio power is on. The tape cartridge can beejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on oroff.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

159

*[AS44320(MBC )01/95] How to store the tape

*[AS44330(MBC )03/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tapeplayer and resume radio play. The cassette willbe stored in the tape player and the X symbolin the display will be lit until you push the“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fastforward and fast rewind can be used while thetape is in storage mode without interruptingradio play.

*[AS44340(MBC )02/95] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS44350(MBC )02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS44360(MBC )04/95] Push the k button to activate Dolby B NoiseReduction. Push again to deactivate.

*[AS44490(MBC )01/95] Tape error messages

*[AS44500(MBC )01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped todiagnose certain problems you may experience.Error codes are as follows:

*[AS44510(MBC )02/95] Error 0 — Communication error between theradio controller and the tape controller. Thecassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tapeagain. If the same error code appears, turn theignition off, then back on again and insert thetape.

*[AS44520(MBC )02/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. Thecassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert thetape again. If the same error code appears in thedisplay, try a different cartridge.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

160

*[AS44530(MBC )02/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Yourcassette tape player will go into the pause mode.Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’teject, refer the problem to qualified personnel forservice.

*[AS44540(MBC )02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS44550(MBC )02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS44560(MBC )02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge toclean the tape player head after 10-12 hoursof play will help maintain the best playbacksound and proper tape operation.

*[AS44570(MBC )02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS44580(MBC )02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS44590(MBC )01/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting cassette.

*[AS44600(MBC )01/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer. High heat in the vehicle can cause thecassette to warp.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

161

%*[AS60900( ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions

*[AS61000( ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS61100( ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS61200( ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS61300( ALL)06/90] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna(whether you have a power antenna ora manually adjustable antenna) is fullyextended to the maximum length forproper reception. If your antenna is notfully extended, you may experiencesignal loss while traveling in fringereception areas.

*[AS61400( ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain

*[AS61500( ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS61700( ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure betweenthe antenna and station, some of the signal“bends” around the building, but certain spotsreceive almost no signal. Moving out of the“shadow” of the structure will allow the stationto return to normal.

*[AS61800( ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects orstructures, the reflected signal cancels the normalsignal, causing the antenna to pick up noise anddistortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also canbecome quite severe in hilly terrain anddepressed roadways.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

162

*[AS61900( ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/monoblend circuit has been incorporated into thissystem. This feature automatically switches aweak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS62000( ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditionson AM frequencies. These can be caused bypower lines, electric fences, traffic lights andthunderstorms.

*[AS62100( ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong SignalCapture and Overload. This can occur whenlistening to a weak station and when passinganother broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although thedisplayed frequency does not change. Whilepassing the tower, the station may switch backand forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS62200( ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present(common in metropolitan areas) several stationsmay overload the receiver, resulting inconsiderable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS62300( ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AMand FM bands has been incorporated into thissystem to reduce strong signal capture andoverload.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

163

%*[AS62400( ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies

*[AS62500( ALL)01/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)establishes the frequencies that AM and FMradio stations may use for their broadcasts. Theallowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600,1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7,107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.

*[AS62600( ALL)01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a givenarea. This radio will tune to each of thesefrequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no finetuning is necessary as radio stations may not useother frequencies.

*[AS62700( ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

164

%*[AS62800( ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] ❑Warranty

*[AS63000( ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] ❑Service

*[AS63300( ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audiosystems with a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.

File:rcasb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:49:06 1996

165

Driving Your Thunderbird

%*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] Driving with an AutomaticOverdrive Transmission

[DR00510(MBC )05/94] The gearshift lever is floor mounted.

*[DR00700( BCGV)01/95] The automatic overdrive transmission operatesvery much like a regular automatic transmission,except it offers the extra overdrive feature.

%*[DR00800( ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

*[DR00950( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.

[DR00965(MBC )03/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignitionkey must be turned to either the OFF or the ONposition and the thumb button must be pushedin. This vehicle is also equipped with the brakeshift interlock safety feature which preventsshifting the transmission out of the P (Park)position without the brake pedal beingdepressed if the key is in the ON position.

*[DR00975( ALL)03/95] To operate:

*[DR00980( ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.

*[DR00985( ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

*[DR00990( ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

166

%*[DR00995( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake ShiftInterlock safety feature. This feature prevents thegearshift from being moved from the P (Park)position until the brake pedal is depressed. Thisfeature is active when the ignition is in the ONposition. If the gearshift lever CANNOT bemoved from P (Park) with the brake pedaldepressed:

*[DR01000( ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignitionkey.

*[DR01005( ALL)01/95] 2. Apply parking brake.

*[DR01010( ALL)01/95] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwiseto the first position (OFF).

*[DR01020( ALL)01/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshiftlever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.

*[DR01025( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.

*[DR01027( ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Servicing YourThunderbird in this Owner Guide for instructionson checking and replacing fuses.

[DR01030(MBC )05/94] The console-mounted gearshift will lock inP (Park) when you turn the key to the LOCKposition. When the gearshift is in any positionexcept P (Park), the ignition key cannot beturned to LOCK or removed from the steeringcolumn. TO REMOVE THE KEY, the gearshiftlever must be in P (Park).

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

167

% [DR01300( BC )03/93]

half page art:0010307-F

The positions of the console-mounted gearshift

*[DR01500( ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desiredposition, release the brake pedal and use theaccelerator as necessary.

%*[DR01700( ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)

*[DR01800( ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

*[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)

[DR01860( ALL)05/94] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transmissionare not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, evenon the slightest incline, unless the parking brakeor brakes are on.

%*[DR01900( ALL)01/95] Driving

[DR01940( BC )07/93] Your vehicle’s gearshift is console-mounted onthe floor. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS)is located on the gearshift handle. The

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

168

Transmission Control Indicator Light (O/D OFF)is located on the instrument panel. You can putthe gearshift lever in any of the severalpositions.

[DR01951(MBC )03/95] The OVERDRIVE OFF light is off (notilluminated) during normal vehicle operation.This allows the transmission to upshift anddownshift from 1st through 4th gears. When theTCS is pressed, the Transmission ControlIndicator Light will illuminate (O/D OFF) on theinstrument panel. When this O/D OFF isilluminated the transmission will upshift anddownshift from 1st through 3rd gears.

[DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” whenthe TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES”when you are driving, have your vehicleserviced at the first opportunity. If this conditionpersists, damage could occur to the transmission.

*[DR01961( BCGV)01/95] To return the transmission to normal operation(1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS again.This switch may be used to cancel overdrive anytime the vehicle is being driven. Each time yourvehicle is started, the overdrive system willautomatically be in the normal overdrive modeand the light will not be illuminated.

%*[DR02010(MBC )01/95] When to use D (Overdrive)

*[DR02100( ALL)01/95] Overdrive is the usual driving position for anautomatic overdrive transmission. It works thesame way Drive works, automatically upshiftingor downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows.

*[DR02200( ALL)01/95] However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourthgear — an overdrive gear — when your vehiclecruises at an appropriate consistent speed forany length of time. This fourth gear will increaseyour fuel economy when you travel at cruisingspeeds.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

169

[DR02500(MBC )05/95] When to use D (Overdrive) — withtransmission control switch activated(O/D OFF light illuminated)

*[DR02600(MBC )01/95] Overdrive may not be appropriate for certainterrain. If the transmission shifts back and forthbetween Third and Fourth gears while you aredriving on hilly roads or if your vehicle doesnot have adequate power for climbing hills,depress the TCS.

*[DR02605( BCGV)01/95] You can depress the TCS at any speed.

*[DR02610( ALL)01/95] When to use 2 (Second)

*[DR02620( ALL)01/95] Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads orto give you more engine braking to slow yourvehicle on downgrades.

*[DR02700( ALL)01/95] When to use 1 (Low)

*[DR02800( ALL)03/95] Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. Itgives more engine braking to slow your vehiclethan 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You canupshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from1 (Low) to Overdrive at any speed.

*[DR03000( ALL)01/95] P (Park)

*[DR03100( ALL)01/95] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park). This locks thetransmission and prevents the rear wheels fromrotating.

*[DR03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park).

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

170

*[DR03225( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

*[DR03400(MBC )01/95] You can tell a console-mounted gearshift issecurely latched in P (Park) if the lever isadjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move itwithout pushing in the thumb button.

% [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped)[DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery

surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on apoor traction surface. Under normal conditionsthe Traction-Lok axle functions as a standardrear axle.

*[DR09740( ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tireson a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.

*[DR09750( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

%*[DR09760( BCGV)03/95] Traction AssistTM (If equipped)

*[DR09770( BCGV)01/95] Your vehicle may be equipped with the optionalTraction AssistTM system. This system helpsprevent wheel spin in order to improve tiretraction and is an especially useful feature whenyou drive in hilly areas or on slippery, icy orsnowy roads.

*[DR09780( BCGV)03/95] Traction AssistTM works automatically by rapidlyapplying and releasing the brakes to prevent oneor both of the rear drive wheels from spinningduring acceleration.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

171

*[DR09782( BC )01/95] The Traction AssistTM system can be manuallyturned off, to allow wheelspin if you want, bypushing the TRACTION ASSIST switch (locatedon the console) when the vehicle is not in theTraction AssistTM mode. The word “OFF” in theswitch will light up to indicate the system is off.The Traction AssistTM system will automaticallybe on each time the engine is started. Duringordinary driving, it is recommended to leave thesystem turned on. The Traction AssistTM systemwill then always be ready to operate whenneeded.

[DR09783( BC )03/94]

one third page art:0011288-A

The Traction AssistTM switch

[DR09785( BCGV)03/95] During the Traction AssistTM function, whichmost often occurs during low speed accelerationon slippery surfaces, a noise may be heardcoming from the engine compartment. This noiseis created by the ABS pump and is normal andmay last for a few seconds during theacceleration of the vehicle.

*[DR09790( BCGV)03/95] In general, this system improves your vehicle’sstability and acceleration performance when roadconditions warrant. Traction AssistTM is fullyeffective up to approximately 25 mph(40 km/h). At 25 mph (40 km/h) the functionbegins to taper off until it no longer operatesabove 34 mph (55 km/h).

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

172

[DR09793( BCGV)01/95] If the Traction AssistTM system is cycledexcessively, the system will shut down toprevent the rear brakes from overheating.During this shutdown period, the word OFF inthe traction assist switch will be illuminatedshowing that the traction assist system isinoperative. A cooling down period is requiredto prevent damage to the rear brakes. This timeperiod varies and depends on brake usageduring the cooling down period. Anti-Lockbraking is not affected and will functionnormally during the cool down period.

[DR09795( BCGV)05/95] NOTE: Traction-Lok axles are not an availableoption on vehicles equipped withtraction assist.

*[DR09800( ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle%*[DR09900( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power

steering uses energy from the engine to helpsteer your vehicle.

%*[DR09950( ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[DR10000( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.

[DR10200( BCGV)12/94] Speed Sensitive Power Steering(If equipped)

[DR10401( BC )06/94] The steering system in 4.6L engine vehicles isspeed sensitive. This means that the steeringeffort is light for parking and heavier forhighway driving. However, if you have toswerve around an object or another vehicle, yoursteering will have full power assist.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

173

%*[DR10500( ALL)03/95] Brakes%*[DR10600( ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes

[DR10650( ALL)05/95] Braking non ABS models

[DR10800( B )03/95] Your vehicle has standard power front discbrakes and rear drum brakes, (anti-lock discbrakes on all four wheels are optional). Theyadjust automatically as the brake pads or liningswear down.

*[DR11100( ALL)04/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

[DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extremebraking can make the wheels lock and slide,possibly decreasing your control of the steering.If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedaland repeat the “squeeze” technique.

[DR11310( ALL)05/95] Braking with ABS brakes

[DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheelswill not lock and slide when you press downhard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakesautomatically start releasing and reapplying thefront brakes independently and the rear brakestogether whenever your wheels start to lock. Donot “pump” the brake pedal on vehiclesequipped with anti-lock brakes. When thishappens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse.This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but itis normal and indicates the ABS is working asdesigned.

*[DR11650( ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brakepedal; you will wear out the linings and increaseyour vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotordamage may also eventually occur.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

174

*[DR11700( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gear and donot apply your brakes continuously. Ifyou apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become lesseffective.

%*[DR11800( ALL)03/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.

[DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found anydetrimental effects of popular mobile radiotransmitting equipment installed on vehicleswith the anti-lock brake system, if the equipmentis installed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. However, if mobile radiotransmitting equipment is installed in yourvehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake systemcycles or the check anti-lock light comes on atany time other than right after you turn the keyto ON or during a sudden stop, have yourmobile radio dealer inspect the installation.

%*[DR12000( ALL)03/95] Parking Brake

*[DR12050( ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used wheneveryou park your vehicle.

[DR12500( BCGV)03/95] The parking brake pedal is suspended just belowthe bottom of the instrument panel to the left ofthe brake pedal.

[DR12900( BC )03/95] To set the parking brake while parking yourvehicle, apply the brake pedal with your rightfoot and hold it while you push the parkingbrake down firmly with your left foot. The brakesystem warning light will glow.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

175

[DR13500( BC )03/95]

one third page art:0010315-A

The parking brake

*[DR13800( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING

Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure that the gearshift is securelylatched in P (Park).

[DR14050( BC )03/95] To release the parking brake, press down on thepedal until you hear a click. Lift your foot offthe pedal. The brake is now released and willreset to lock the next time you press the pedal,located below the lower left corner of theinstrument panel. The Brake System WarningLight will glow if the parking brake is not fullyreleased when the engine is running.

*[DR14200( ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light eachtime you start your engine. Driving with theparking brake on will cause the brakes to wearout quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.

*[DR14300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

176

[DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for staticparking only and is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.

*[DR14500( ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions%*[DR14600( ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving

*[DR14700( ALL)03/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive andhandle differently from your previous vehicle.Use care until you become accustomed to itsvarious features and driving characteristics.

*[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, orcombinations of these maneuvers can cause avehicle to behave differently than anticipated.

%*[DR15200( ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather

%*[DR15300( ALL)01/95] Slippery roads

*[DR15400( ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:

*[DR15500( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheelunless necessary.

*[DR15600( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.

[DR15700( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not use speed control.

*[DR15800( ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.

*[DR15900( ALL)03/92] ❑Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly toavoid locking your wheels. (Does not applyto vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)

*[DR16000( ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

177

*[DR16200( BCGV)01/93] RWARNING

To avoid skidding and losing control onslippery roads, do not downshift into First(1) when you are moving faster than20 mph (32 km/h).

*[DR16225( ALL)03/95] RWARNING

If your vehicle has speed control, do notuse it on slippery roads. You could losecontrol of your vehicle and could injuresomeone.

[DR16300(MBC )03/92] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mudor snow), you may try to “rock” it out of thespot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forwardand reverse gears. At the same time, presslightly on the accelerator.

*[DR16400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

[DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,you may gain enough momentum to move outof the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for morethan a few minutes. This may overheat theengine, damage the transmission, or damage thetires. If you are still stuck after a minute or twoof rocking, call for a tow truck.

%*[DR16700( ALL)01/95] High water

*[DR16800( ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless youare sure that the water is below the bottom ofthe wheel rims.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

178

*[DR16900( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, driveslowly. You may have limited traction or wetbrakes, so allow extra stopping distance becauseyour vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.

*[DR17000( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,apply your brakes gently several times as yourvehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry thebrakes.

%*[DR17100( ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[DR17200( ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry or tow. The total weight ofyour vehicle, plus the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

% [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWRon the Safety Compliance Certification Label onthe left front door lock facing or the door latchpost pillar.

*[DR17400( ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affectthe GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage ofreplacement tires with higher weight limit thanoriginals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires maylower GVWR and GAWR limitations.

*[DR17500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

If the GVWR or the GAWR specified onthe Safety Compliance Certification Labelis exceeded, your vehicle may be damagedor you may lose control and injuresomeone.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

179

%*[DR17503( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load

*[DR17506( ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must notexceed the maximum load stated on the SafetyCompliance Certification Decal attached to theleft front door pillar.

*[DR17509( ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, addthe weights of:

*[DR17512( ALL)01/95] ❑ the driver and passengers

*[DR17515( ALL)01/95] ❑ luggage and any other items that you put inyour vehicle

*[DR17518( ALL)01/95] ❑ the tongue load of the loaded trailer

*[DR17521( ALL)01/95] ❑ the weight of any equipment that has beenadded to your vehicle since it was deliveredto your dealer

*[DR17524( ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of theseitems, use the following procedure to figure theweight of a load:

*[DR17527( ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,passengers and luggage. You might takeyour vehicle to a shipping company or aninspection station for trucks.

*[DR17530( ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,passengers and luggage.

*[DR17533( ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second tofigure the total weight of the load.

*[DR17536( ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also makesure that the total weight of your vehicle, plusthe load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,make sure that the weight your vehicle carriesover each axle is less than the GAWR for therespective axle.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

180

*[DR17539( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the loador remove cargo accordingly.

*[DR17542( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Improper distribution of your vehicle’sload or carrying weight in excess of theamount shown on the tire decal can causerapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.

%*[DR17550(MBC )04/95] Trailer Towing

*[DR17650( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factoryfully equipped to tow. No towing packages areavailable through Ford or Lincoln/Mercurydealers.

*[DR17700( ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain onyour vehicle, you must follow certainprecautions for your safety and the good of yourvehicle:

*[DR17800( ALL)01/95] ❑Stay within the load limits for towing yourvehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in thischapter.)

*[DR17900( ALL)01/95] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare yourvehicle for towing, making sure to use theright equipment and to attach it properly.(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[DR18000( ALL)01/95] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehiclewhile you tow. (See Driving while you tow inthis chapter.)

*[DR18100( ALL)01/95] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if youtow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if youtow in this chapter.)

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

181

*[DR18175( ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight shouldbe on the tongue. However, the tongue loadshould never exceed 10% of the maximumweight that your vehicle can safely tow.

*[DR18250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not tow a trailer when the temporaryspare tire is being used.

[DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towingvehicle. The amount of weight that you cansafely tow depends on the optional equipmenton your vehicle. See the following chart.

% [DR18400( ALL)03/90] Trailer towing specifications

[DR18600( BC )03/95]

six pica chart:0010654-D

*[DR20900( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow

*[DR21000( ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of yourvehicle, use the right equipment for the type oftrailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towingequipment is properly attached to your vehicle.If you are not certain that you are using theright equipment in the proper manner, see yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[DR21100( ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto yourvehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed tobear the load.

*[DR21125( ALL)01/95] Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’stires when preparing to tow (see inflationrecommendation on the tire label).

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

182

%*[DR21150( ALL)01/95] Using the hitch

*[DR21200(MBC )01/95] Your vehicle uses a load carrying hitch. Becausethis type of hitch places the tongue load of atrailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle, youmust distribute the load in your trailer so thatonly 10 to 15% of the total weight of the traileris on the tongue.

*[DR21600( ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift andchange the weight on the hitch. This willprevent damage to your vehicle and make yourvehicle easier to handle.

%*[DR21650( ALL)01/95] Connecting the safety chains

*[DR21700( ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to yourvehicle. They help protect your trailer if thehitch breaks.

*[DR21800( ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:

*[DR21900( ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongueand attach them to your vehicle’s frame orhook retainers. Never attach the safetychains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumperis not designed to bear the weight of atrailer.

*[DR22000( ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack inthe chains to allow you to turn corners.

*[DR22100( ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructionsthat the rental agency gives you.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

183

%*[DR22150( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s brakes

*[DR22200( ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, orsurge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them accordingto the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure thatyour trailer’s brakes meet local and federalregulations.

[DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, provisions have been madeunder the instrument panel for installation of anelectronic brake controller.

*[DR22300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brakesystem directly to your vehicle’s brakesystem. Your vehicle may not haveenough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

%*[DR22350( ALL)01/95] Connecting the trailer’s lights

*[DR22400( ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting systemwiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting systemwiring. To get the proper equipment forhooking up your trailer’s lights, see your localtrailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure tofollow their instructions carefully.

[DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring andequipment has been installed at the factory. Thetrailer feed wire (supplied in a box in theluggage compartment) needs a connectorcompatible with your trailer prior to installation.

*[DR22500( ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, youmay cause damage to the vehicle’s lightingsystem.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

184

%*[DR22600( ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow

*[DR22650( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when driving while youtow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country onhot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.

[DR22950(MBC )09/93] If you tow in Overdrive while riding throughhilly country, your vehicle may frequently shiftbetween Overdrive and Third gears. To preventyour vehicle from shifting too much, depress theTransmission Control Switch (TCS). This willalso give the engine more power going up hillsand better engine braking going down hills.

%*[DR23000( ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you aretowing on very long, steep grades, the speedcontrol may shut off.

*[DR23100( ALL)01/95] Servicing your vehicle if you tow

*[DR23200( ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, yourvehicle will need to be serviced more frequentlythan usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule andRecord booklet for additional information.

File:rcdrb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:37 1996

185

Roadside Emergencies

%*[RE00400( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[RE00450( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave thelights on or any electrical equipment on afteryou turn the engine off. If this happens, youmay be able to jump-start from a booster batteryto start your vehicle.

*[RE00500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.

*[RE00600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.

%*[RE00700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[RE00800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

186

*[RE00900( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.

*[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,and to avoid injury to yourself, follow thesedirections for preparing your vehicle to jump-startand connecting the jumper cables in the order theyare given. If in doubt, call for road service.

*[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle

[RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery.

*[RE01200( ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).

*[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

*[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.Turning on the fan helps protect theelectrical system from voltage surges. Turnoff all other switches and lights in bothvehicles to prevent possible damage to eithervehicle’s electrical systems.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

187

%*[RE01700( ALL)05/95] Connecting the jumper cables

*[RE01800( ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[RE02000( ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (s) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

[RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to agood metallic surface on the engine or frameof the disabled vehicle making sure it isclear of any rotating engine components. Thefollowing illustrations show where you canfind a metallic surface.

*[RE02200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (s) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

188

[RE02500( BC )05/95]

full page art:0010334-D

The 3.8L SFI engine

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

189

[RE02650(MBC )05/95]

full page art:0010666-G

The 4.6L SFI Engine

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

190

*[RE02900( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting

*[RE03000( ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[RE03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.

%*[RE03300( ALL)03/95] Removing jumper cables

*[RE03400( ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (s) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[RE03500( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03600( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[RE03700( ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[RE03800( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.You may need to use a battery charger to fullyrecharge the battery.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

191

%*[RE03900( ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire

*[RE04000( ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

%*[RE04100( ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire

[RE04225(MBC )03/94] You have a high pressure temporary spare tire.This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire andis designed for emergency use only. Use it onlywhen you get a flat tire and replace it as soonas you can. This spare tire is marked with thewords “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that youcan easily identify it.

*[RE04250( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extended use of other thanconventional spare tires on aTraction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness.This loss of effectiveness does notaffect normal driving and should notbe noticeable to the driver.

*[RE04300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING

If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

192

*[RE04400( ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[RE04500( ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[RE04600( ALL)01/95] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[RE04700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[RE04800( ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.

*[RE04900( ALL)01/95] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[RE05000( ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[RE05100( ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

193

%*[RE05500( ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location

[RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk.

[RE05900( BC )11/93]

two third page art:0010339-F

The spare tire location

%*[RE06500( ALL)02/95] To remove the spare tire:

*[RE06600( BC )01/95] 1. Remove the spare tire cover.

*[RE06700( BC )01/95] 2. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down thespare tire.

*[RE06750( BC )01/95] NOTE: Wing-nut is not removable.

[RE06800( BC )12/91] 3. Lift out the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

194

%*[RE07300( ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[RE07525( BCGV)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set theparking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you arechanging.

[RE07550( BCGV)05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,the transmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent thevehicle from moving when you change a tire, besure the parking brake is set, then block thewheel (both directions) that is diagonallyopposite (other side and end of the vehicle) tothe tire being changed.

*[RE07560( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

*[RE07875( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

*[RE07900( ALL)05/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

[RE08000( BC )11/92] 3. Remove any optional wheel covers orhubcaps with the tapered end of a wheel nutwrench. Insert the handle of the wrench andtwist it against the inner wheel cover flange.For more about removing wheel covers, seethe information later in this chapter.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

195

*[RE08100( ALL)01/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turncounterclockwise, but do not remove themuntil the tire is raised off the ground. Youshould pull up on the handle rather thanpush to develop maximum force to loosenwheel lug nuts. See Anti-Theft Wheel LugNuts later in this chapter for information onremoving anti-theft lug nuts.

%*[RE08150( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire

[RE08250( BC )12/94] 1. Find the underbody notches closest to thewheel to be removed. Center the jackbetween (2) underbody notches and turn thehandle of the jack clockwise until the wheelis completely off the ground.

*[RE08400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

To lessen the risk of personal injury, donot put any part of your body under thevehicle while changing a tire. Do not startthe engine when your vehicle is on thejack. The jack is only meant for changingthe tire.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

196

[RE08550( ALL)10/92]

half page art:0010759-A

The improper lift point

[RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as alift point.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

197

% [RE08600( BC )02/92]

half page art:0010346-C

The notches for the jack

*[RE08900( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until thewheel clears the ground. Remove the wheellug nuts.

*[RE08920( ALL)01/95] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,making sure that the air valve stem is facingoutward.

*[RE08940( ALL)03/95] 4. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until thewheel is snug against the hub. The bevelededges on the lug nuts face inward. Do notfully tighten the lug nuts until you lower thevehicle. If you do, you could force thevehicle off the jack.

*[RE08960( ALL)02/95] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

198

*[RE08980( ALL)01/95] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration. As soon as possible, have yourdealer or a qualified service technician checkthe lug nuts for proper torque specifications.

% [RE09100( ALL)03/93]

quarter page art:0010350-A

The lug nuts on the wheel

[RE09400( ALL)01/95] 7. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in thetrunk.

*[RE09500( ALL)03/95] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure the jack is securely fastened so it doesnot rattle when you drive.

*[RE09600( ALL)03/95] 9. Unblock the wheels.

% [RE10600(MBC )12/94] Aluminum Road Wheel Ornaments(If equipped)

[RE10700(MBC )03/93] To remove the ornament, stick the tapered endof the jack handle between the ornament andwheel and pry off the ornament.

[RE10800(MBC )03/93] To replace the ornament, stick one side of theornament into the center of the wheel and strikethe other side with the palm of your hand.

%*[RE10900( BC )02/95] Center Wheel Cover[RE11000(MBC )03/93] To remove the wheel cover:[RE11100( BC )03/91] 1. Pry the center ornament from the wheel

cover using the tapered end of the jackhandle. Do not use a screwdriver or anyother tool. If you do, you may damage thecover. The wheel, with the wheel cover stillattached, may now be removed from thevehicle by removing the five lug nuts.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

199

[RE11300( BC )03/91] 2. If the tire needs to be removed from thewheel, remove the five screws, using aPhillips head screwdriver. Then pull thewheel cover off the wheel.

[RE11400( BC )05/92]

half page art:0010353-B

The center attachment wheel cover

[RE11500(BC )03/93] To replace the wheel cover:

[RE11600( BC )03/91] 1. Place the tire valve stem hole in the wheelcover over the tire valve stem. Align theholes in the wheel cover mounting pad withthe center holes in the metal inserts. Installand tighten the five screws.

[RE11700( BC )03/91] 2. Align the legs of the ornament with the slotson the wheel cover. Strike the ornament withthe palm of your hand.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

200

%*[RE12700(MBC )03/95] Anti-Theft Wheel Lug Nuts (If equipped)

*[RE12800( BC )01/95] If your vehicle has this option, one of the lugnuts on each wheel locks and must be unlockedwith a special key. The key and registration cardare attached to the lug wrench and stored withthe spare tire. If you lose the key, send theregistration card to the manufacturer (not thedealer) to get a replacement key.

*[RE12850(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If entire lug wrench/lug nut keyassembly is lost, see your nearest Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer who hasaccess to a master set of keys.

*[RE12875(MBC )03/95] DO NOT USE A POWER IMPACT WRENCHON THE LUG NUT KEY.

[RE13000(MBC )03/95]

quarter page art:0010357-B

The anti-theft lug nut and key

*[RE13100(MBC )03/95] Removing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13300(MBC )03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Makesure that you hold the key square to the lug nut.If you hold the key on an angle, you maydamage the key and the lug nut.

*[RE13400(MBC )03/95] Place the lug nut wrench over the lug nut keyand apply pressure on the key with the wrench.Turn the wrench in a counterclockwise directionto remove the lug nut.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

201

*[RE13500(MBC )03/95] Replacing the anti-theft lug nut

*[RE13600(MBC )03/95] Insert the key over the locking lug nut. Place thelug nut wrench over the lug nut key and, whileapplying pressure on the key, install the lug nut.

*[RE13800( ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[RE13810( ALL)04/95] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[RE13900( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel pumpwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[RE14000( ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset thefuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-offswitch in the Index.

%*[RE14100( ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle

*[RE14201( ALL)05/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contacta professional towing service or, if you are amember, your roadside assistance center.Recommended towing options include wheel lifttowing or flat bed towing.

[RE14210( BC)01/96] DO NOT TOW WITH SLINGBELT EQUIPMENTWHEN TOWING YOUR THUNDERBIRD FROMTHE REAR. Ford Motor Company has notdeveloped or approved a T-hook sling-typeprocedure. When slingbelt towing from the front,the towbar will deform the soft fascia (bumper).However, it will return to an acceptable shape.In both cases, wheel lift or flatbed equipment isrecommended.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

202

*[RE14300( ALL)05/95]

three fourths page art:0001463-A

*[RE14400( ALL)05/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operatorwhat kind of vehicle you have. A towingmanual is available from Ford Motor Companyfor all authorized tow truck operators. Haveyour tow truck driver refer to this manual forthe proper hook-up and towing procedures foryour vehicle.

File:rcreb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:48:15 1996

203

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorsthat put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of3 years or 36,000 miles (3 years or 60,000 km),whichever comes first. To purchase RoadsideAssistance coverages beyond this period,through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer (not available inCanada).

*[HS00215( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220( ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225( ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230( ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235( ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240( ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

204

%*[HS00245( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250( ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400( ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

205

%*[HS00500( ALL)03/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns(U.S. or Canada)

*[HS00600( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700( ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.

*[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

206

*[HS01025( ALL)04/95] In the U.S., contact:

%*[HS01050( ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060100-E

*[HS01100( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS01150( ALL)04/95]

one inch art:0060101-C

*[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information availablewhen contacting Ford Customer Assistance:

*[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500( ALL)04/95] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS01600( ALL)03/95] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

%*[HS01700( ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)listed on your owner card and/or yourvehicle ownership license

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

207

[HS01800( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0010630-A

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)

*[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,you may wish to contact the Dispute SettlementBoard (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.

%*[HS02300( ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. Only)

*[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,independent dispute-settlement programavailable free to owners or lessees of qualifyingFord Motor Company vehicles.

*[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this process at any time withoutnotice and without incurring obligations.

*[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS02700( ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance andservice complaints on Ford, Mercury and LincolnCars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks underwarranty that have not been resolved by adealer or Ford Motor Company.

*[HS02750( ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:

*[HS02800( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product

*[HS02900( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

208

*[HS03100( ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction

*[HS03200( ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses unless incidental to a service orproduct complaint being reviewed

*[HS03300( ALL)01/95] ❑ Items not covered by your warranty

*[HS03400( ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims

*[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS03500( ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation

*[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,family, or household purposes

*[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles onwhich applicable express written newvehicle warranties have expired atreceipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differaccording to state law. For example, seethe unique brochure for Californiapurchasers/lessees.

*[HS03700( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS03800( ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:

*[HS03900( ALL)04/95] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS04000( ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer

*[HS04200( ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

209

*[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warrantystart date), you have a right to make an oralpresentation before the Board by indicating yourchoice on the application. Also, oralpresentations may be requested by the Board. Adecision is made by the Board by simplemajority vote.

[HS04320( ALL)06/93] Board members review all the materials relatedto each complaint and, based on the availableinformation, arrive at a fair and impartialdecision. Decisions are based on the writtenstatements and any oral presentations made byeach of the involved parties.

*[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases will take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board will make everyeffort to resolve each case within 40 days after itreceives the customer application form.

*[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Boardwill mail you its decision in writing. It will alsoprovide you with a form to indicate youracceptance or rejection of an award decision. Thedecisions of the Board are binding on the dealerand Ford, but customers may have other optionsavailable to them under state or federal law.

*[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may beintroduced into evidence by any party insubsequent legal proceedings that may beinitiated.

*[HS04700( ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?

*[HS04800( ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address torequest a brochure/application. You will be senta brochure and a one-page customer applicationform. The form should be completed and mailedto the same address.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

210

*[HS04900( ALL)02/93]

one inch art:0060102-B

*[HS05100( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?

*[HS05200( ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating the file numberassigned to your application and the local Boardaddress. At the same time, your dealer and FordMotor Company representative are asked tosubmit statements.

*[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders that relate tothe case

*[HS05500( ALL)04/95] ❑ the year, make, model, and vehicleidentification number

*[HS05600( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date you bought your vehicle

*[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑ the date of repair and the mileage at the timeof repair

*[HS05800( ALL)04/95] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold you thevehicle or who serviced your vehicle

*[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolvedcomplaint

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

211

*[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were takenwith the dealer and Ford Motor Company

*[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑ the names (if known) of all people youcontacted at the dealership

*[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done toresolve your concern.

*[HS06305( ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,an explanation will be mailed to you.

%*[HS07400( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

*[HS07500( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[HS07600( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.

*[HS07700( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

212

%*[HS08700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS08800( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited

*[HS08900( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS09000( ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060101-C

%*[HS09100( ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP)

*[HS09200( ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where asolution cannot be reached between a vehicleowner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of itsdealers (that all parties can agree upon), theowner may wish to use the services offered bythe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

[HS09300( ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of ProvincialAdministrators to assist consumers in schedulingand preparing for their arbitration hearings.However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’sdispute resolution process as outlined under“Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. orCanada)” earlier in this chapter.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

213

*[HS09400( ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further informationabout the program can obtain an informationbooklet from your dealer or contact theProvincial Administrator, Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address ortelephone number shown below.

*[HS09500( ALL)05/95] O & P Services595 Bay Street — Suite 300Toronto, OntarioM5G 2C2Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685

[HS09600( ALL)05/95] This plan is not available in the province ofQuebec.

%*[HS09700( ALL)05/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS09800( ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS09900( ALL)05/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS10000( ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS10100( ALL)05/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

214

*[HS10200( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS10300( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0060103-H

*[HS10400( ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS10500( ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.

File:rchsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:39 1996

215

Accessories

*[AC00200( ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00240( ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

*[AC00280( ALL)04/95]

fourteen pica chart:0001204-B

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

216

*[AC00300( ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

*[AC00350( ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience

[AC00430( BC )03/94]

fourteen pica chart:0010542-K

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

217

[AC00530( B )03/95]

sixteen pica chart:0010543-J

*[AC01400( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.

[AC01500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or in Canada theCanadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulates the useof mobile communications systems —such as two-way radios, telephones,and theft alarms — that are equippedwith radio transmitters. Any suchequipment installed in your vehicleshould comply with FCC regulationand should be installed only by aqualified technician.

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

218

*[AC01600( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC01700( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

220

% [AC02100( B )12/94]

thirty-six pica chart:0011323-A

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

221

[AC02200( B )12/94]

thirty-six pica chart:0011324-A

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

222

[AC02300( B )12/94]

thirty-six pica chart:0011325-A

File:rcacb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:47:21 1996

223

Servicing Your Thunderbird

%*[SV00300( ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy

*[SV00400( ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[SV00550( ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[SV00600( ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[SV00700( ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[SV00800( ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such asthe headlamp bulbs — that can be replacedwithout tools.

*[SV00900( ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet.

*[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

*[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, yourdealership can provide the parts and servicerequired. Check your Warranty Information Bookletto find out which parts and services are covered.Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of thisOwner Guide.

*[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that theOwner Maintenance Checks listed in theMaintenance Schedule and Record booklet beperformed for the proper operation of your

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

224

vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed inthe Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for anyunusual noise, vibration, or other indication thatyour vehicle may need service. If you do noticesomething unusual, see that your vehicle isserviced promptly.

*[SV01275( ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to Fordspecifications. Motorcraft parts are designed andbuilt to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement isyour assurance that Ford-built quality stays inyour vehicle.

%*[SV01400( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[SV01600( ALL)06/95] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[SV01700( ALL)06/95] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

%*[SV01800(MBC )10/95] ❑Do not work on a hot engine. The enginecooling fan may come on unexpectedly.Always turn the engine off and let it cool.

*[SV01850(MBC )10/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

225

*[SV01900( ALL)06/95] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[SV02000( ALL)06/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.

*[SV02100( ALL)08/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[SV02200( ALL)06/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

*[SV02600(MBC )03/95] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Battery in this chapter.

*[SV02800( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine off:

*[SV03000( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV03100( ALL)06/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[SV03150( ALL)06/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[SV03200( ALL)03/95] Working with the engine on:

*[SV03400( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[SV03501( ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

226

*[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.

%*[SV03650( ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood

[SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood releaselocated under the lower left corner of theinstrument panel.

[SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, andrelease the auxiliary catch that is locatedunder the front edge of the hood at thecenter of the vehicle.

[SV04070( BC )05/95]

one third page art:0010537-A

The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood

*[SV04200( BCGV)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the counterbalancedhinges hold it open.

*[SV04400( BCGV)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.

*[SV04450( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch atsix-month intervals to maintain smoothand trouble-free operation.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

227

%*[SV04600( ALL)04/95] Engine Compartment

*[SV04700(MBC )09/93] Your vehicle has one of these types of engines:

[SV04900(MBC )06/95] ❑a 3.8 liter SFI engine

[SV05075(MBC )03/95] ❑a 4.6 liter SFI engine

*[SV05300(MBC )11/94] The following pages show diagrams of eachengine type and where to find items that youshould regularly service.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

228

[SV05600(BC)03/93]

fullpageart:0010327-C

A3.8

literS

FIen

gine

File:rcsvb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

229

[SV05750(BC)05/95]

fullpageart:0010665-G

A4.6

literS

FIen

gine

File:rcsvb.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

230

%*[SV05850( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine

*[SV06000( ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because abuildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,keeping the engine warmer than usual.

*[SV06020( ALL)07/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

*[SV06040( ALL)08/95] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block or fuel injection pump, do notspray a hot engine or injection pump withcold water.

*[SV06060( ALL)07/95] ❑The alternator, distributor and air intake mustbe covered. Covering these components willhelp prevent water damage.

*[SV06080( ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.

%*[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank

*[SV06240(MBC )05/95] The fuel door is outside the car on the passengerside near the back. To fill the fuel tank:

*[SV06550( ALL)05/95] 1. After opening the fuel filler door, removethe cap carefully and slowly by turning itcounterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

*[SV06650( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

The fuel system may be under pressure. Ifthe fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound while disengagingthe fuel cap, wait until it stops beforecompletely removing the cap. Otherwise,fuel may spray out and injure you orothers.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

231

*[SV06700( ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe before pumping the fuel.

*[SV06800( ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body ofyour vehicle, clean it off immediately.The fuel may dull or soften the paintif you do not wash it off.

%*[SV06850( ALL)08/95] 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when youare finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn untilit is tight. It will click when it is fullytightened.

*[SV06875( ALL)10/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.

[SV06900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with aMotorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If youdo not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision, endangering you and yourpassengers.

*[SV06950( ALL)09/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the fuel tank and/or fuel system.

%*[SV07500( ALL)06/95] Choosing the Right Fuel

[SV07600( ALL)02/96] Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leadedfuel is prohibited by law and could damageyour vehicle. The damage may not be coveredby your warranty.

[SV07701( ALL)02/96] Your vehicle was not designed to use fuelcontaining manganese-based additives such asMMT. Additionally, vehicles certified toCalifornia emission standards (indicated on theunderhood Vehicle Emissions ControlInformation label) are designed to operate onCalifornia reformulated gasolines. If California

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

232

reformulated gasoline is not available when yourefuel, your vehicle can be operated onnon-California fuels. However, even though yourengine will perform adequately on othergasolines, the performance of the emissioncontrol devices and systems may be adverselyaffected. Repair of damage caused by using afuel that your vehicle was not designed for maynot be covered by your warranty.

[SV08750( ALL)02/96] Octane recommendation

[SV08800( ALL)02/96] Your vehicle is designed to use regular gasolinewith an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do notrecommend gasolines labeled as “regular” inhigh altitude areas that are sold with octaneratings of 86 or even less.

[SV08900( ALL)05/95]

one inch art:0060001-C

[SV09200( ALL)02/96] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavilyunder most driving conditions on therecommended octane fuel, see your dealer or aqualified service technician to prevent anyengine damage.

[SV09355( ALL)02/96] Fuel Quality

[SV09360( ALL)02/96] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle orhesitation problems try a different brand of fuel.If the condition persists, see your dealer or aqualified service technician.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

233

[SV09370( ALL)02/96] The American Automobile ManufacturersAssociation (AAMA) issued a gasolinespecification to provide information on highquality fuels that optimize the performance ofyour vehicle. We recommend the use ofgasolines that meet the AAMA specification ifthey are available.

[SV09380( ALL)02/96] It should not be necessary to add anyaftermarket products to your fuel tank if youcontinue to use a high-quality fuel.

[SV09800( ALL)02/96] Cleaner air

[SV09900(MBC )02/96] Ford recommends the use of gasolines toimprove air quality, including reformulatedgasolines, that contain oxygenates such as amaximum of 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE. Thereshould be no more than 5% methanol withcosolvents and additives to protect the fuelsystem.

%*[SV10185( ALL)06/95] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels

[SV10195( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled. Tominimize the risk that you will beinjured, please read the followinginformation carefully and observe therecommended precautions.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

234

*[SV10197( ALL)07/95] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling

*[SV10199( ALL)07/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels areextremely flammable.

*[SV10201( ALL)07/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.

*[SV10205( ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Gasoline or gasoline blended withmethanol can cause blindness andpossible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately.

*[SV10209( ALL)07/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

*[SV10211( ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash withsoap and water.

*[SV10225( ALL)07/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contactlenses (if worn), flush with water for 15minutes, and seek medical attention.

*[SV10227( ALL)08/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.

*[SV10230( ALL)08/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

235

%*[SV11300( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel

*[SV11350( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onmodern powertrain components.

*[SV11500( ALL)07/95] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.

[SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy

*[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency ofyour vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K).

*[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during yourvehicle’s break-in period. This would not be anaccurate estimate of how much fuel your vehiclewill normally use.

*[SV11800( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:

*[SV11900( ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

*[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.

*[SV12100( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tankand record the final odometer reading.

*[SV12200( ALL)10/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fueleconomy:

*[SV12250( ALL)10/95] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven) v(gallons used)

*[SV12275( ALL)10/95] ❑Metric: L/100k = (liters used) v(100 kilometers)

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

236

*[SV12300( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates

*[SV12400( ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained fromlaboratory tests under simulated road conditionsand may not reflect the actual conditions youexperience or your style of driving. The EPAfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.

*[SV12650( ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[SV12700( ALL)05/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[SV12800( ALL)05/95] ❑Rapid acceleration and excessive speed

*[SV12850( ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

*[SV12900( ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops

*[SV12950( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling

*[SV13000( ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[SV13100( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

*[SV13200( ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires

*[SV13300( ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads

*[SV13400( ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.

*[SV13510( ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers

*[SV13520( ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, youshould also perform a few simple maintenanceroutines. This extra effort will save youadditional money and contribute to the drivingefficiency of your vehicle.

*[SV13530( ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tiregauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshieldwasher fluid.

*[SV13540( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the engine oil at every refueling stop

*[SV13550( ALL)01/95] ❑Clean the windshield, outside mirrors andheadlights

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

237

*[SV13560( ALL)01/95] ❑Check windshield washer fluid

*[SV13570( ALL)02/95] ❑Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges

*[SV13580( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the tire pressure at least monthly

%*[SV13600( ALL)02/95] Engine Oil Recommendations[SV13610( ALL)02/96] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an

equivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationWSS-M2C153-F and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[SV13650( ALL)03/95]

one third page art:0060021-E

The API Certification Mark

*[SV13670( ALL)01/95] Never use:

*[SV13680( ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[SV13690( ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[SV13700( ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments

%*[SV13702( ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[SV13703( ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

238

%*[SV13775( ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[SV13900( ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:

*[SV14000( ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[SV14025( BCGV)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.

*[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.

[SV14350( BC )10/95]

one inch art:0011218-A

Engine oil dipstick — 4.6 liter engines

[SV14450(MBC )03/95]

one inch art:0000970-A

Engine oil dipstick — 3.8 liter engines

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

239

*[SV14500( BCGV)11/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, addengine oil as necessary. If the oil level isbeyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damageor high oil consumption may occur andsome oil must be removed from the engine.

*[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

*[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.

%*[SV16300( ALL)06/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter

*[SV16400( ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per thefollowing, whichever occurs first.

*[SV16500( ALL)04/95]

one third page art:0060618-C

*[SV16800( ALL)06/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet for additional information.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

240

%*[SV16900( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

*[SV17275( ALL)07/95] RWARNING

Continuous contact with USED motor oilhas caused cancer in laboratory mice.

*[SV17285( ALL)07/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap andwater.

%*[SV17300( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant%*[SV17400( ALL)09/95] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[SV17500( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

*[SV17600( BCGV)10/95] RWARNING

The cooling fan is automatic and maycome on at any time. Always disconnectthe negative terminal of the battery beforeworking near the fan.

%*[SV17800( ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine fromoverheating in the summer and from freezing inthe winter. Check the level of the coolant at leastonce a month. Simply look at the engine coolantreservoir located in the engine compartment. Tolocate the reservoir, see the diagram of yourvehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in thischapter.

*[SV17850( ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entirecooling system from internal passagewaycorrosion and these additives lubricate the waterpump. The coolant should be serviced as notedin the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

241

[SV18000( BCGV)02/96]

half page art:0010761-D

The engine coolant reservoir

%*[SV18600( ALL)08/95] Checking Hoses

*[SV18700( ALL)11/94] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses andhose connections for deterioration, leaks, andloose hose clamps as specified in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet. Repair or replacewith Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.

*[SV18800( ALL)09/95] Adding Engine Coolant

*[SV18900( ALL)09/95] RWARNING

Do not put engine coolant in the containerfor the windshield washer fluid.

*[SV18950( ALL)09/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant orantifreeze could make it difficult to see throughthe windshield.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

242

[SV19000(MBC )05/95] RWARNING

Never remove the radiator cap or ventplug while the engine is running or hot.

[SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury thatcan be caused by escaping steam or enginecoolant.

[SV19040(MBC )03/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engineoff and let it cool. Even when the engine iscool, be careful when you remove theradiator cap or vent plug.

[SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towelaround the cap and turn it slowlycounterclockwise to unscrew.

*[SV19150( ALL)09/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

[SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to press the capdown, turn it, and remove it.

*[SV19170(MBC )09/95] 5. Stand away from the radiator opening. Hotsteam may blow out or hot engine coolantmay even splash out.

*[SV19190( ALL)09/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixtureyour vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refillcapacities for fluids in the Index.

% [SV19200( ALL)06/95] Add engine coolant only to the reservoir. If thecoolant level is low, add a 50/50 or appropriatemixture of water and the type of engine coolantthat Ford specifies. You may add water by itselfonly in an emergency, but you should replace itwith a 50/50 or appropriate mixture as soon aspossible.

*[SV19300( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if you have to add more than aquart (liter) of engine coolant more than once amonth.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

243

*[SV19350( ALL)09/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is anoptimized formula that will protect all metals andrubber elastomers used in Ford engines for fouryears or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is notnecessary and not recommended to usesupplemental coolant additives in your gasolinepowered vehicle. These additives may harm yourengine cooling system. Follow the recommendedservice interval for changing your engine coolant.

*[SV19450( ALL)09/95] NOTE: When you change or add enginecoolant, it is important to maintainyour engine coolant concentrationbetween 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your localclimate conditions. Below 40% you willlose freeze protection and above 60%your engine may overheat on a warmday.

[SV19460( ALL)09/95] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant mayvoid your warranty for the enginecooling system. Use only a premiumnationally recognized brand nameengine coolant. Do not use alcohol,methanol antifreeze or engine coolantmixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. If you do not use the propercoolant, the aluminum radiator on yourvehicle will corrode.

*[SV19470( ALL)09/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes theFord Rotunda engine coolant recycling processand chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycledengine coolant or an equivalent recycled enginecoolant that is certified by the supplier to meetFord specification ESE-M97B44-A.

%*[SV19480( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

244

*[SV19500( ALL)09/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System FluidE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent engine coolant that meets FordSpecification ESE-M97B44-A.

*[SV19550( ALL)09/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make surethat the coolant will not freeze at thetemperature level in which you drive duringwinter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolantin your engine that has a protection rating of atleast -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection ratingis appropriate for the climate in which you live.

%*[SV20100( ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush

*[SV20200( ALL)11/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drainand flush of the cooling system can be found inthe Car Service Manual. Following theserecommended procedures will ensure that thespecified coolant level and a 50/50 orappropriate mixture of coolant and water ismaintained.

*[SV20300( ALL)08/95] Engine Coolant Refill Procedure

*[SV20400( ALL)01/95] When the entire cooling system is drained andrefilled, the following procedure should be usedto ensure a complete fill:

*[SV20450( ALL)05/95] NOTE: It is imperative the followingprocedure be adhered to. Failure to doso could result in damage to yourengine.

[SV20500(MBC )03/95] 3.8L engine only

[SV20601(MBC )03/94] ❑Open the vent plug.

[SV20700(MBC )03/93] ❑Remove coolant recovery reservoir cap.

[SV20801(MBC )03/93] ❑Remove radiator pressure cap.

[SV20900(MBC )05/94] ❑With the engine off and cool, add a 50/50mixture of recommended cooling system fluidand water to the radiator until full, then addto the reservoir until the reservoir is at theFULL-HOT level.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

245

[SV21000(MBC )12/91] ❑Close the vent plug.

[SV21100(MBC )03/93] ❑Reinstall the coolant recovery reservoir capby installing the cap to the fully installedposition.

[SV21110(MBC )03/93] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap to the pressurerelief position by installing the cap to thefully installed position, and then backing offto the first stop.

[SV21200(MBC )03/93] ❑Start and idle engine until the radiator upperhose is warm (this indicates the thermostat isopen and coolant is flowing through theentire system).

[SV21300(MBC )03/93] ❑ Immediately shut off engine. Cover capcompletely with a thick cloth and cautiouslyremove radiator pressure cap and add a50/50 mixture of recommended coolant andwater until system is full.

[SV21400(MBC )03/91] ❑Reinstall the radiator cap securely.

[SV21500(MBC )05/94] ❑Remove the cap from the engine coolantrecovery reservoir and add a 50/50 mixtureof recommended cooling system fluid andwater to the FULL-HOT mark on the enginecoolant recovery reservoir. Check thatreservoir hose is not kinked.

[SV21800(MBC )03/93] ❑Reinstall the reservoir cap.

*[SV21900(MBC )05/95] ❑Check for leaks at the draincock, block plugand vent plug.

*[SV22000(MBC )03/95] ❑Recheck the engine coolant level, using therecommended procedure, after one or twooccasions of vehicle use.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

246

[SV22010( BC )05/95] 4.6L engine only

*[SV22014( ALL)03/95] ❑With the engine OFF and cool, remove thepressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.Remove the heater hose and clamp, locatedon the rear of the intake manifold.

*[SV22021( ALL)03/95] ❑Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater to the coolant reservoir. Refer to RefillCapacities later in this chapter for the correctamount. Add coolant to the reservoir untilthe coolant continuously flows out of the tubein the rear of engine. Reattach hose andsecure clamp.

[SV22026( ALL)03/95] ❑Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolantis at the FULL COLD level.

*[SV22031( ALL)05/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap to the fullyinstalled position.

*[SV22036( ALL)05/95] ❑Start and idle the engine until the radiatorupper hose is warm (this indicates thethermostat is open and coolant is flowingthrough the entire system).

*[SV22041( ALL)03/95] ❑ Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap andadd a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant andwater until the coolant is at the COLD FILLlevel in the coolant reservoir.

*[SV22046( ALL)03/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap securely.

*[SV22050( ALL)03/95] ❑Check for leaks at the draincock.

*[SV22055( ALL)03/95] ❑Recheck the engine coolant level, using therecommended procedure, after one or twooccasions of vehicle use.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

247

%*[SV22090( ALL)03/95] Battery

*[SV22100( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery. When the originalequipment battery is replaced under warranty, itmay be replaced by a MotorcraftLow-Maintenance Battery.

*[SV22130( ALL)06/95] The Low-Maintenance Battery has removablevent caps for checking the electrolyte level andfor adding water, if necessary. The electrolytelevel should be checked at least every 24 monthsor 24,000 miles (40,000 km) in temperatures upto 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperaturesabove 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level ineach cell up to the level indicator. Do notoverfill.

*[SV22145( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water tothe battery, provided the water isn’t hard ordoesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content.However, if possible you should refill the batterywith distilled water. If the battery needs waterquite often, have the charging system checkedfor a possible malfunction.

%*[SV22160( ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[SV22175( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[SV22190( ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0000983-A

Battery recycling symbol

%*[SV22194( BCGV)03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from the

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

248

battery. If you ever disconnect the battery orinstall a new battery, you must allow thecomputer to “relearn” its idle conditions beforeyour vehicle will drive properly. To let theengine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park), turnoff all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Letthe engine idle for at least one minute. (Enginemust be warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allowapproximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and gotraffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely“relearn” its idle.

%*[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid andWipers

%*[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid

[SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluidperiodically, or when the optional lamp indicateslow fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid islocated on the driver’s side of the enginecompartment. Visual inspection can determine ifthe washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate thewasher when the reservoir is empty.

[SV23000( BC )12/91]

one third page art:0010375-B

The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

249

*[SV23400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

%*[SV23500( ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.

%*[SV23600( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades

*[SV23700( ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.

*[SV23800( ALL)09/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

*[SV23900( ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition to the ACC position and turnyour wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to the OFFposition. Do not move the wipers manually.Manually moving the wipers across thewindshield may damage them.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

250

*[SV24000( ALL)03/01] Wiper blade replacement

*[SV24100( ALL)09/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent. To replace the blades, follow theinstructions that come with them.

%*[SV24200( ALL)03/95] Tires

*[SV24300( ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fueltank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[SV24500( ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommendedpressures.

*[SV24600( ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (seeLoad limits in the Index).

*[SV24700( ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[SV24800( ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.

*[SV24900( ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.

*[SV24950( ALL)07/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.

*[SV25000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

251

%*[SV25200( ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.

*[SV25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.

%*[SV25500( ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation

*[SV25600( ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them as indicated in thefollowing diagram.

*[SV25700( ALL)01/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the MaintenanceSchedule. If you notice that the tires wearunevenly, have them checked.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

252

[SV26040( B )03/95]

half page art:0010731-E

Rotating the tires

%*[SV26500( ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires

*[SV26600( ALL)05/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16inch (2 mm) of tread left.

% [SV26700( ALL)05/94]

one inch art:0001318-A

A worn-out tire

*[SV26800( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread. Some spotswear more heavily than others.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

253

*[SV26850( ALL)01/95] RWARNING

When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.

*[SV27100( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.

%*[SV28100( ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades

*[SV28200( ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have theirTire Quality Grade (described below) moldedinto the tire’s sidewall. These Tire QualityGrades are determined by standards that theUnited States Department of Transportation hasset.

*[SV28250( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatictires for use on passenger cars. They do notapply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tireswith nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as defined in Title 49Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

*[SV28300( ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tirequality grades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires Ford to give you thefollowing information about tire grades exactlyas the government has written it.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

254

%*[SV28399( ALL)01/95] Treadwear

*[SV28400( ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

*[SV28499( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C

*[SV28500( ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on braking (straightahead) traction testsand does not include cornering (turning)traction.

*[SV28599( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C

*[SV28600( ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds toa level of performance which all passenger cartires must meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

255

represent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The temperaturegrade for this tire is established for a tire that isproperly inflated and not overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

%*[SV28700( ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains

*[SV28800( BCGV)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.

*[SV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[SV29000( ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency orif the law requires them where you live. If youchoose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, beaware of the following:

*[SV29100( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size foryour tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.Other types may damage your vehicle.

*[SV29200( ALL)01/95] ❑Put the chains on tightly with the ends helddown securely. Verify that no chain touchesany wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Followthe chain manufacturer’s instructions.

*[SV29300( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rubor bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicleand tighten the chains. If you continue tohear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

256

*[SV29400( ALL)10/94] ❑Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[SV29500( ALL)05/94] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunityafter using them on snow and ice. Do not usethe chains on dry roads.

%*[SV29600( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels

*[SV29700( ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[SV29800( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.

%*[SV30450( ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[SV30475( ALL)01/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need tocheck the fluid level of the transmission, sinceyour vehicle does not use up transmission fluid.Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Recordbooklet for replacement intervals. However, ifthe transmission is not working properly — forinstance, the transmission may slip or shiftslowly, or you may notice some sign of fluidleakage — the fluid level should be checked.

%*[SV30550( ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic TransmissionFluid

*[SV30560( ALL)05/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluidlevel at normal operating temperature150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately 20miles (30 km) of driving. However, if necessary,you can check the fluid level without having todrive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a normaloperating temperature if outside temperaturesare above 50˚F (10˚C).

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

257

[SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start theengine and, while fully applying the brakepedal, move the transmission shift selectorthrough all of the gear ranges allowing sufficienttime for each position to engage. Securely latchthe transmission shift selector in the P (Park)position, fully set the parking brake and leavethe engine running.

[SV30625(MBC )03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven ifthe fluid level is below the low coldreading on the dipstick.

*[SV30650( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick outand wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.

[SV30675(MBC )10/95] When checking fluid at normal operatingtemperature 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluidlevel should be within the hot notched area onthe dipstick. When the vehicle has not beendriven, and the fluid is at room temperature50˚F-95˚F (10˚C-35˚C), the fluid level should bewithin the cold notched area.

*[SV30715( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds or incity traffic during hot weather, orpulling a trailer, the vehicle should beturned off for about 30 minutes toallow the fluid to cool before checking.

%*[SV30725( ALL)08/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid[SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct

type will be used. Use only MERCONH fluid.

*[SV30775( ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level to the correctarea on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If thelevel is above the top hole on the dipstick,excess fluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

258

%*[SV30801( ALL)09/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

[SV30825(MBC )03/93]

one third page art:0011152-A

Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick

%*[SV31900( ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid

*[SV32000( ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake lining wears.

[SV32200( BCGV)03/95] Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engineoil change or at least once a year. You can dothis by looking at the fluid level in the plasticreservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see labelon reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder,see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluidlevel should be between the MIN and MAXmarks.

*[SV32350( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Brake fluid is toxic.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

259

*[SV32375( ALL)07/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

*[SV32400( ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir tothe MAX line with Ford High Performance DOT3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA, C6AZ-19542-BA,or equivalent DOT 3 fluid meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.

*[SV33100( ALL)01/95] RWARNING

If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT3, you will cause permanent damage toyour brakes.

*[SV33200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

[SV33500( BC )03/93]

one third page art:0010387-A

The brake system fluid reservoir

*[SV33700( ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

260

*[SV33750( ALL)01/95] RWARNING

Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.

[SV34725( BC )12/91]

half page art:0010487-B

The anti-lock brake system fluid reservoir

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

261

%*[SV34800( ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid

*[SV34900( ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[SV35000( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

[SV35050( BC )10/95] 3.8L SFI engine

*[SV35100( ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[SV35200( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[SV35300( ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.

%*[SV35400(MBC )03/94] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (whichis highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). Thefluid level should be between the arrows inthe FULL HOT range, which is marked onthe side of the dipstick, opposite the sidemarked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if thelevel is within the FULL HOT range.

*[SV35500(MBC )07/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluidin small amounts, continuously checking thelevel, until you reach the FULL HOT range.Do not overfill.

*[SV35600(MBC )03/95] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick backin and make sure that it fits snugly.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

262

[SV35700(MBC )12/94]

half page art:0010485-C

The dipstick for power steering fluid

[SV35850( BC )05/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets FordSpecification ESW-M2C33-F, such as FordPremium Power Steering Fluid, E6AZ-19582-AAor is an equivalent Type F AutomaticTransmission Fluid with a Ford registrationnumber (an 8-digit number beginning with “2P”printed on the fluid container).

*[SV35900( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.

*[SV36100(MBC )02/95] If you check the power steering fluid when it iscold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULLCOLD range on the dipstick. The reading willonly be accurate if the fluid temperature isapproximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

263

[SV36155( BC )10/95] 4.6L SFI engine

[SV36170(MBC )03/95] 1. Check the fluid level when the system isCOLD (allow at least one half hour afterdriving for the power steering fluid to cool).

[SV36171(MBC )10/95] 2. Locate the power steering reservoir mountedto the front upper left-hand corner of theengine.

[SV36178( BC )10/95] 3. Visually verify that the fluid level is abovethe MIN line adjacent to the reservoir “sightwindow.”

[SV36182( BC )10/95] 4. If the power steering fluid is below the MINline, remove the cap and add fluid in smallamounts until the level is between the MINand MAX lines.

[SV36185( BC )10/95] 5. Reinstall the reservoir cap.

[SV36190( BC )10/95]

half page art:0011153-A

Fluid level for power steering

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

264

[SV36200( BC )06/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford’sSpecification ESW-M2C33-F, such as FordPremium Power Steering Fluid, E6AZ-19582-AAor an equivalent Type F Automatic TransmissionFluid with a Ford registration number (an 8-digitnumber beginning with “2P” printed on thefluid container).

*[SV36250(MBC )03/95] NOTE: If the power steering fluid is low, donot drive your vehicle for a longperiod of time before adding fluid.This can damage the power steeringpump.

% [SV36300(MBC )12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses andCircuit Breakers

*[SV36400( ALL)03/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuitbreakers protect your vehicle’s wiring systemfrom overloading. If electrical parts in yourvehicle are not working, the system may havebeen overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped acircuit breaker. Before you replace or repair anyelectrical parts, check the appropriate fuses(conventional and high current) or circuitbreakers.

*[SV36600( ALL)03/95] The following charts tell you which fuses orcircuit breakers protect the wiring for eachelectrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows ora circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts ofyour vehicle that use that circuit will not work.

*[SV36610( ALL)01/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuitbreakers to check, follow the procedures underChecking and replacing fuses or Checking andreplacing circuit breakers in this chapter.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

265

[SV36800( BC )07/93]

half page art:0010412-B

The instrument panel fuse panel location

[SV37300( BC )11/93]

half page art:0010413-C

The instrument panel fuse panel

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

266

%*[SV37500( ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, CircuitBreakers and Relays

[SV37900( BC )02/96]

thirty-four pica chart:0010392-J

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

267

[SV38000( BC )02/96]

twelve pica chart:0010493-F

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

268

[SV38100( BC )02/96]

twenty-eight pica chart:0010391-J

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

269

%*[SV39000( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses

*[SV39200( ALL)01/95] High current fuses are circuit protectors that arepart of the wiring harness for some electricalequipment. These, like fuses, open when thecircuit load exceeds their amperage rating. Highcurrent fuses may be purchased from your Fordor Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

*[SV39300(MBC )01/95] The high current fuse panel is located in theengine compartment on the left-hand fenderapron.

*[SV39600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Always disconnect the battery beforeservicing high current fuses.

*[SV39700( ALL)07/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses bereplaced by a qualified technician.

[SV39900( BC )03/93]

half page art:0011157-A

The high current fuse panel location

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

270

% [SV40100( ALL)06/93] The high current fuse panel

[SV40400( BC )07/93]

full page art:0010428-E

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

271

[SV40600( ALL)06/93] The high current fuses and relays

[SV41000( BC )05/95]

twenty-eight pica chart:0010429-L

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

272

%*[SV41210( ALL)06/95] Checking and Replacing Fuses

*[SV41215( ALL)02/95] If you need to check a fuse, follow these steps:

[SV41225( BC )03/93] 1. Find the fuse panel underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

[SV41245( BCGV)03/93] 2. Check the fuse to see if it is blown. Lookthrough the clear side of the fuse to see ifthe metal wire inside is separated. If it is,the fuse should be replaced.

[SV41550( ALL)05/92]

quarter page art:0010416-A

The side view of a fuse

[SV41700( BC )04/89] 3. Replace the fuse with one that has the rightamperage rating. (See the following chart.)To remove the fuse use the pulling toolattached to the inside cover of the fusepanel. There are also four spare fusesattached to the cover.

[SV41900( ALL)07/95]

eight pica chart:0001092-B

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

273

[SV41920( BC )09/93]

eight pica chart:0011219-A

*[SV42500( ALL)08/95] RWARNING

Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[SV42600( BC )11/89] 4. Close the cover.

*[SV42800( ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.

%*[SV42900( ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers

*[SV43000( ALL)01/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker that is onthe fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses inthis chapter to find out how to locate the fusepanel.

[SV43200( ALL)12/94] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allowthe electrical parts to work again once theoverload on the circuit is removed. If the circuitbreakers continue to cut off electricity, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked.

*[SV43250( ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuitbreakers. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

274

*[SV43300( ALL)08/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with thesame amperage rating. To remove a circuitbreaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it withyour finger and thumb and pull it straight outof its socket.

%*[SV44400( ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[SV44500( ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[SV44600( ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps

*[SV44700( ALL)01/95] ❑ tail lamps

*[SV44800( ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps

*[SV44900( ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher

*[SV44950( ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp

*[SV45000( ALL)01/95] ❑ turn signals

*[SV45200( ALL)01/95] ❑ license plate lamp

%*[SV45600( ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[SV45700( ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[SV45800( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[SV45900( ALL)01/95] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantiallyaway from a position slightly down and tothe right

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

275

%*[SV46000( ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb

*[SV46100( ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.

*[SV46200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[SV46300( ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.

[SV46400( BC )07/93]

half page art:0010431-A

Parts of a headlamp

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

276

*[SV46600( ALL)03/95] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[SV46700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is inthe OFF position.

*[SV46800( BC )02/95] 2. Lift the hood and find the bulb in theheadlamp socket.

*[SV46900( BC )01/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector from thebulb by grasping the wire with a quick pullrearward.

*[SV47100( BC )01/95] 4. Remove the retaining ring by turning it 1/8of a turn to free it from the socket. Thenslide the ring off the plastic base. Keep thering. You must use it again to hold the newbulb in place.

*[SV47400( ALL)03/95] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[SV47600(MBC )02/95] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic basefacing upward, insert the glass end of thebulb into the socket. You may need to turnthe bulb left or right to line up the groovesin the plastic base with the tabs in thesocket. When the grooves are aligned, pushthe bulb into the socket until the plastic basecontacts the rear of the socket.

*[SV47800(MBC )08/95] 2. Slip the bulb retaining ring over the plasticbase until it contacts the rear of the socket.Lock the ring into the socket by rotating itclockwise until you feel a “stop.”

*[SV47900( ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear ofthe plastic base until it snaps, locking it intoposition.

*[SV48000(MBC )02/95] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure thatthey work properly. If the headlamp wascorrectly aligned before you changed thebulb, you should not need to align it again.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

277

%*[SV48370( BCGV)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs

[SV48380( BCGV)06/94] Your vehicle has a brakelamp mounted in therear window, called a high-mount brakelamp.You may need to remove this lamp at times toreplace the brakelamp bulb or to clean the rearwindow.

[SV48500( B )03/92]

half page art:0010434-A

Parts of the high-mount brakelamp

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

278

% [SV48900( BCGV)06/94] To remove the high-mount brakelamp:

[SV49200( BC )01/89] 1. Slide the trim cover toward the front of thevehicle to disengage the retaining clips.

[SV49500( BC )01/89] 2. Twist the socket counterclockwise andremove from lamp.

[SV50015( BC )03/91] 3. Pull bulb out of socket.

[SV50100( BC )01/89] 4. Remove the retaining screw.

[SV50200( BC )01/89] 5. Lift the lamp above the carpet and slideaway from the rear window.

[SV50260( BC )05/94] 6. Replace the burned out bulbs.

*[SV50300( BCGV)02/95] To install the high-mount brakelamp:

[SV50400( BC )01/89] 1. Slide the lamp into slots, toward the rearwindow.

[SV50700( BC )01/89] 2. Install the screw.

[SV51000( BC )01/89] 3. Push bulb into the socket.

[SV51300( BC )01/89] 4. Install the bulb and socket into the lamp andtwist socket clockwise until it locks.

[SV51500( BC )01/89] 5. Slide the trim cover toward rear of vehicleto engage the retaining clips.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

279

%*[SV51600( ALL)10/92] Using the Right Bulbs

[SV51900( BC )03/95]

thirty-four pica chart:0010440-H

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

280

%*[SV52400( ALL)03/95] Emission Control System

*[SV52500( ALL)12/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter which enables your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.

*[SV52550( ALL)06/95] RWARNING

Exhaust leaks may result in the entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumes intothe passenger compartment. Underextreme conditions excessive exhausttemperatures could damage the fuelsystem, the interior floor covering, orother vehicle components, possiblycausing a fire.

*[SV52600( ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[SV52700( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[SV52800( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[SV52900( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[SV52950( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not push start your vehicle.

*[SV53000( ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in the MaintenanceSchedule and Record booklet performedaccording to the specified schedule. Thescheduled maintenance services are requiredbecause they are considered essential to thelife and performance of your vehicle and toits emissions system.

*[SV53075( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or serviceof the emissions control devices or systems inyour new Ford Motor Company vehicle orengine may be performed at your expense byany automotive repair establishment orindividual using automotive parts equivalent to

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

281

those which your vehicle or engine wasoriginally equipped.

*[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuineFord replacement parts. If other than Ford orMotorcraft parts or Ford authorizedremanufactured parts are used for maintenancereplacements or for the service of componentsaffecting emission control, such non-Ford partsshould be equivalent to genuine Ford MotorCompany parts in performance and durability. Itis the owner’s responsibility to determine theequivalency of such parts. Please consult yourwarranty booklet for complete warrantyinformation.

*[SV53175( ALL)05/95] RWARNING

Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[SV53200( ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, lossof oil pressure, the charge warning light, thecheck engine light, or the temperature warninglight. These sometimes indicate that the emissionsystem is not working properly.

*[SV53300( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[SV53400( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

282

*[SV53500( ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.

*[SV53600( ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[SV53700( ALL)05/95] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.

%*[SV53702( ALL)07/95] Readiness for Inspection/MaintenanceTesting

*[SV53715( ALL)07/95] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a“need for additional mixed city and highwaydriving to complete the check” of the OBD IIsystem. As soon as all of the OBD II systemchecks are successfully completed, the OBD IIsystem is set to the ready condition. The amountof driving required to reach the ready conditionvaries with individual driving patterns. Tocomplete this requirement in the minimumamount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycledefined below. If the vehicle owner cannot ordoes not want to do the additional drivingrequired by law, a service center can performthis drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

283

*[SV53717( ALL)09/95] OBD II Drive Cycle

[SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the ordershown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving mode isacceptable between steps.

*[SV53735( ALL)06/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner accordingto traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.

*[SV53740( ALL)07/95] The engine must be warmed up and atoperating temperature before proceeding withthe drive modes of the following OBD II DriveCycle.

*[SV53745( ALL)06/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)the vehicle for 4 minutes.

*[SV53747( BCGV)06/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV53752( BCGV)07/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (70 km/h)at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.

*[SV53757( BCGV)07/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at45 mph (70 km/h) for 30 seconds.

*[SV53763( BCGV)06/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.

*[SV53768( BCGV)07/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic atspeeds between 25 and 40 mph(40-60 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15minute drive cycle the following modes mustbe achieved:

*[SV53772( ALL)07/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10seconds each

*[SV53775( ALL)07/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2throttle position, and

*[SV53777( ALL)07/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5minute steady state throttle drives.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

284

*[SV53780( BCGV)07/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and60 mph (70-100 km/h). This should takeapproximately 5 minutes.

*[SV53784( BCGV)07/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady atthe selected speed between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.

*[SV53788( BCGV)07/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varyingspeeds between 45 and 60 mph(70-100 km/h).

*[SV53792( BCGV)07/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in Drivefor 40 seconds.

*[SV53796( ALL)07/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

285

*[SV53800( ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[SV53900( ALL)07/95] Refill Capacities

[SV54200( BC )05/95]

twenty-two pica chart:0010447-M

*[SV54550( ALL)11/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must bereplaced every 100,000 miles(160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, thelube should not be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repairrequired.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

286

%*[SV54600( ALL)10/95] Motorcraft Parts

[SV54850( BC )03/95]

fourteen pica chart:0010452-M

[SV55000( ALL)09/94] If a spark plug is removed for examination, itmust be reinstalled in the same cylinder.

[SV55025(MBC )05/94] For 3.8L engines:

[SV55050(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3 have an EG suffix.

[SV55075(MBC )03/95] Cylinders #4, #5, #6 have an E suffix.

[SV55100( ALL)05/95] For 4.6L (2V) engines:

[SV55125( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #1, #2, #3, #4 have a PG suffix.

[SV55150( ALL)05/95] Cylinders #5, #6, #7, #8 have a P suffix.

[SV55200( ALL)03/95] If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use onlyspark plugs with the service number suffix letteras shown on the engine decal.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

287

%*[SV55300( ALL)05/95] Lubricant Specifications

[SV55800( BC )02/96]

twenty-eight pica chart:0010584-H

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

288

[SV55900( BC )03/95]

fourteen pica chart:0010585-K

*[SV56400( ALL)11/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must bereplaced every 100,000 miles(160,000 km) or if the axle has beensubmerged in water. Otherwise, thelube should not be checked or changedunless a leak is suspected or repairrequired.

%*[SV57000( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage

*[SV57100( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips

*[SV57150( ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[SV57200( ALL)01/95] General

*[SV57300( ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[SV57400( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[SV57500( ALL)01/95] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

289

*[SV57600( ALL)01/95] Body

*[SV57700( ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[SV57800( ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[SV57900( ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[SV58000( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.

*[SV58100( ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hingesand latches with a light grade oil.

*[SV58200( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[SV58300( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.

%*[SV58350( ALL)01/95] Engine

*[SV58400( ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[SV58500( ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[SV58600( ALL)01/95] Fuel system

%*[SV58700( ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[SV58900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

290

*[SV59000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

%*[SV59200( ALL)01/95] Cooling system

*[SV59300( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[SV59400( ALL)01/95] Battery

*[SV59500( ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[SV59600( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

*[SV59650( ALL)03/95] ❑ If storing your vehicle for more than 30 dayswithout recharging the battery, it may beadvisable to disconnect the battery cables toensure battery charge is maintained for quickstarting.

[SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, itwill be necessary to reset memoryfeatures.

%*[SV59700( ALL)01/95] Brakes

*[SV59800( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[SV59900( ALL)01/95] Tires

*[SV60000( ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[SV60100( ALL)01/95] Miscellaneous

*[SV60200( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[SV60300( ALL)03/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts and preventcorrosion.

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

291

[SV60400( ALL )01/96]

File:rcsvb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:46:54 1996

297

[QI01350( BC )05/95]

full page art:0011379-A

Label Locations

File:rcqib.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

298

[QI01400(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011108-C

Front

Exterior

View

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

299

[QI01600(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011110-C

Rear

Exterior

View

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

300

[QI01800(B)03/95]

fullpageart:0011112-D

En

trance

View

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

301

[QI02000(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011114-C

Driver’s

Door

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

302

[QI02200(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011116-C

Instru

men

tP

anel

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

303

[QI02400(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011118-C

Instru

men

tC

luster

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

304

[QI02700(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011121-C

Tru

nk

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

305

[QI02900(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011123-C

3.8LE

ngin

eC

omp

artmen

t

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

306

[QI03000(B)05/95]

fullpageart:0011124-C

4.6LE

ngin

eC

omp

artmen

t

File:rcqib.exU

pdate:M

on Feb 19 10:44:04 1996

Index 307

Index

AABS warning light

(see Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . 58Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 45Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 237Air bag supplemental restraint system

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21proper seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25wearing safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Air cleaner filter, location . . . . . . . . 227Air conditioning

manual heating and air conditioningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

semi-automatic temperature controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Alarm, activating remote personal . . . . 112Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 240Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 173warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Anti-theft lug nuts and key . . . . . . . 200Anti-theft system

arming the system . . . . . . . . . . 106description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104disarming an untriggered system. . . . 108disarming a triggered system . . . . . 109triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 203Audio system

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 131

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

308 Index

Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . 84Automatic transmission

driving an automatic overdrive . . . . . 165fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 256fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 285fluid, specification . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Axle, traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

BBacking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . . . 185charging system warning light . . . . . . 60disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 247jumping a disabled battery . . . . . . . 185maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 247proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 247replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 286voltage gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 290

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 57specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Brakelampbulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 279high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 277

Brakesadjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173anti-lock brake system (ABS)

warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . 58applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 173brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 57fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 258fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 259fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 287

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 309

Brakes (continued)front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 4noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 290

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . . . 166Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Bulbs, replacing

headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

CCanada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 212Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 285Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . . 51Car seats for children

(see Child safety seats) . . . . . . . . . 27Cassette tape player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . 141, 150Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 280CD player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 131Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 69Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 60Child safety restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 25

child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 43child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 27automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 29in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . . 35in rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Chimekey in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

310 Index

Chime (continued)safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Circuit breakerschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 273see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Cleaning your vehiclechrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . . 6engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 230exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 74instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . . 90interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 123washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Climate control systemair conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 77heating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 77

Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Cold engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Compact disc radio (see Electronic sound

system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . 127Coolant (see Engine coolant)

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 240drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 244preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 290proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 242refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 285refill procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 244specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 66

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 311

Cooling fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Cruise control (see Speed control) . . . . . 97Customer Assistance Center,

Ford (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Customer Assistance Centre,

Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . 206

DDashboard (see Instrument panel) . . . . . 73Daytime running light system . . . . . . . 82Defrost

rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 79

Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 207Doors

door ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . 71lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 287

Driving under special conditionsbad weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178high water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177slippery roads . . . . . . . . . . . . 176towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

EElectrical system

circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 273fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264operating when the engine is off . . . . . 45

Electronic sound systemradio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . 161tuning the radio . . . . . . . . . 133, 152warranty and service information . . . 164

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . 142

Emergencies, roadsideassistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . . . 185jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

312 Index

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 174Emission control system,

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 280Engine

check engine warning light . . . . . . . 63does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . . 47fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . . 53preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . . 47service points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 53storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 289

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 240checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 241disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243low coolant warning light . . . . . . . . 72preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 290proper solution . . . . . . . . . . . . 242recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 240refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 285specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Engine coolant temperature gaugedescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Engine oil

changing oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 239checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 238dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 69filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 286refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 285specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 313

Entry systemilluminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 4

FFederal Communications Commission . . . 163Flashers, hazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Flashing the lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Fluid refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . 285Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 206Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 207Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 4Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 212Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 212Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 213French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3Fuel

capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 230filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 286fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . 72storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 289

Fuel cap, removing . . . . . . . . . . . 230Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 286Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Fuel pump shut-off switch, starting

after a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Fuse panels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 269high current fuse panel . . . . . . . . 270instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . 264

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

314 Index

Fusescharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266checking and replacing . . . . . . . . 272circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

GGas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 230Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 231Gauges, Mechanical

engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 66engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 69fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65multi-gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 165console-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 167positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

HHazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Headlamps

autolamp system . . . . . . . . . . . . 84bulb specification . . . . . . . . . . . 279checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 274cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 82

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 315

Headlamps (continued)flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 275turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Heating

manual heating and air conditioningsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

semi-automatic system . . . . . . . . . 77High beams, indicator light . . . . . . . . 62High-mount brakelamp

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277replacing the bulb . . . . . . . . . . 278

Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 287release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Hoses, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

IIdentification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 206Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 45removing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Indicator lamp module . . . . . . . . . . 71Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . . . . 27Instrument cluster, mechanical . . . . . . . 56Instrument panel

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90lighting up panel and interior . . . . . . 86location of components . . . . . . . . . 73

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

316 Index

JJack

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 187disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 190

KKeys

key in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 46positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 45removing from the ignition . . . . . . . 46stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 46

LLamps

bulb replacement specifications chart . . 279checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274courtesy lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89daytime running light system . . . . . . 82dome lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88flashing the lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . 92hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83high beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . 277illuminated entry system. . . . . . . . 103illuminated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 126interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86map lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 274trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . 91Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 317

Lights, warning and indicatorair bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60anti-lock brakes (ABS). . . . . . . . . . 58brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57charging system . . . . . . . . . . . . 60check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63check gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62door ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62low coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72low fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 72low washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 72overdrive off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . 65

Load limitsGAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 287Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 129Lug nuts

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200tightening sequence . . . . . . . . . . 198

MMaintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 223Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 258Mirrors

rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124side view mirrors (power) . . . . . . . 124vanity mirror, illuminated . . . . . . . 126

Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

318 Index

NNational Highway Traffic Safety

Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

OOdometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 236Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 282Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

PPanic alarm feature, remote entry system . 112Parking brake

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . . 286PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . 286Phone, cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Power distribution box (see Fuses) . . . . 264Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261driving with power steering . . . . . . 172fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 260fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 285fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 287

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 319

RRadio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 131Rear window, defroster . . . . . . . . . . 81Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 285Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Remote control, trunk . . . . . . . . . . 129Remote entry system

locking/unlocking doors . . . . . . . 111opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . 111panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112replacement/additional transmitters . . 113replacing the batteries . . . . . . . . . 112

Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 203Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 185Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

SSafe driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Safety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 7Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . 182Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 211Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts . . . . 10, 12, 16automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 10center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . 16cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . . 18extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 17for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . 14replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17warning light and chime . . . . . . . . 59

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

320 Index

attaching with tether straps . . . . . . . 27automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . . 29in center seating positions . . . . . . . . 42in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 35tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . . 27

Seatsadjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . 118adjusting the seats, power . . . . . . . 121child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 27cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 123head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 118rear seat access . . . . . . . . . . . . 123reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 120sport seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 206Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Servicing your vehicle, precautions

when servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Side mirrors, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . 124Sliding moon roof (see Moon roof) . . . . 115Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 255Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . . . 194finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 193removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 193temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 286Specification chart, lubricants . . . . . . . 287Speed control

accelerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99canceling a set speed . . . . . . . . . 100resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99resuming a set speed . . . . . . . . . 100turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . 184

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . . 47

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 321

Starting your vehicle (continued)starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . . 48starting after a collision . . . . . . . . . 53starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . . 48

Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Steering wheel

horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45speed controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Storage compartmentscenter console . . . . . . . . . . . . 127map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 288Sun visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 60Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . 18

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Tail lamps

bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 279cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 74Tether anchor installation

(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . . 27Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Tires

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 251cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 255storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 290tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 180Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . . 201

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

322 Index

Traction assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . . . 170Trailer towing

calculating maximum trailerweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Transmissionautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 165fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 285lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 287

Transmission control switch . . . . . . . 167Transmitter (see Remote entry) . . . . . . 111Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Trunk

remote release lever . . . . . . . . . . 129using the keys to open . . . . . . . . 129using the remote entry system to open . 111

Tune-up specifications (VECI). . . . . . . 282Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

UUsed engine oil, disposal . . . . . . . . . 240

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . 93VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)

decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 206

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

Index 323

Vehicle loadingautomatic transmissions . . . . . . . . 179calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 179

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Ventilating your vehicle

(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . 76, 80Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . 237Visor (see Sun visor) . . . . . . . . . . 126

WWarm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . . 48Warning chimes

key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Warranties, radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid

reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 178Wheels

anti-theft lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . 200cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 250ornaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Windowspower windows, operating . . . . . . 114rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Windshield washer fluid and wiperschecking and adding fluid . . . . . . . 248checking and replacing wiper blades . . 249low washer fluid light. . . . . . . . . . 72operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

File:rcixb.exUpdate:Thu Feb 15 12:06:08 1996

324

Service StationInformation

[GS00200( BC )05/95]

eighteen pica chart:0011186-E

File:rcgsb.exUpdate:Mon Feb 19 10:43:01 1996